Double-Take$9$,/$%,/,7<

Version 
'RXEOH7DNH$YDLODELOLW\IRU/LQX[8VHU
V*XLGH
 Notices
Double-Take Availability for Linux User's Guide Version 7.1.2, Wednesday, October 28, 2015
l Product UpdatesCheck your service agreement to determine which updates and new releases
you may be eligible for. Product updates can be obtained from the support web site at
http://www.VisionSolutions.com/SupportCentral.
l SalesIf you need maintenance renewal, an upgrade license key, or other sales assistance, contact
your reseller/distributor or a Vision Solutions sales representative. Contact information is available on
the Vision Solutions Worldwide Locations and Contacts web page at
http://www.VisionSolutions.com/Company/Vision-HA-Locations.aspx.
l Technical SupportIf you need technical assistance, you can contact CustomerCare. All basic
configurations outlined in the online documentation will be supported through CustomerCare. Your
technical support center is dependent on the reseller or distributor you purchased your product from
and is identified on your service agreement. If you do not have access to this agreement, contact
CustomerCare and they will direct you to the correct service provider. To contact CustomerCare, you
will need your serial number and license key. Contact information is available on the Vision Solutions
CustomerCare web page at http://www.VisionSolutions.com/Support/Support-Overview.aspx .
l Professional ServicesAssistance and support for advanced configurations may be referred to a
Pre-Sales Systems Engineer or to Professional Services. For more information, see the Windows
and Linux tab on the Vision Solutions Consulting Services web page at
http://www.visionsolutions.com/services-support/services/overview .
l TrainingClassroom and computer-based training are available. For more information, see the
Double-Take Product Training web page at http://www.VisionSolutions.com/Services/DT-
Education.aspx.
l Linux man pagesMan pages are installed and available on Double-Take Linux servers. These
documents are bound by the same Vision Solutions license agreement as the software installation.
This documentation is subject to the following: (1) Change without notice; (2) Furnished pursuant to a
license agreement; (3) Proprietary to the respective owner; (4) Not to be copied or reproduced unless
authorized pursuant to the license agreement; (5) Provided without any expressed or implied warranties, (6)
Does not entitle Licensee, End User or any other party to the source code or source code documentation of
anything within the documentation or otherwise provided that is proprietary to Vision Solutions, Inc.; and (7)
All Open Source and Third-Party Components (OSTPC) are provided AS IS pursuant to that OSTPCs
license agreement and disclaimers of warranties and liability.
Vision Solutions, Inc. and/or its affiliates and subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries
own/hold rights to certain trademarks, registered trademarks, and logos. Hyper-V and Windows are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Linux is a
registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. vSphere is a registered trademark of VMware. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective companies. For a complete list of trademarks registered to other
companies, please visit that companys website.
2015 Vision Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 6
Core operations 7
Supported configurations 10
Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 17
Replication Console 18
Using Replication Console workspaces 19
Clearing stored security credentials 20
Failover Control Center 21
Setting the frequency of Failover Control Center console refreshes 22
Double-Take Console 23
Double-Take Console requirements 25
Console options 26
Managing servers 29
Adding servers 34
Providing server credentials 37
Viewing server details 38
Editing server properties 40
Server licensing 41
Viewing server logs 43
Managing VMware servers 45
Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 46
Files and folders requirements 47
DTSetup 50
Running DTSetup 51
Setup tasks 52
Activating your server 53
Modifying security groups 54
Configuring block device replication 55
Configuring server settings 57
Configuring driver performance settings 58
Starting and stopping the daemon 59
Starting DTCL 60
Viewing documentation and troubleshooting tools 61
DTSetup menus 62
Data protection 63
Establishing a data connection using the automated Connection Wizard 64
Creating a replication set 66
Establishing a connection manually using the Connection Manager 69
Establishing a connection across a NAT or firewall 73
Simulating a connection 75
Protection monitoring 76
Monitoring a data workload 77
Log files 83
Viewing the log files through a text editor 84
Viewing the Double-Take log file through the Replication Console 85
Configuring the properties of the Double-Take log file 87

Contents 3
 Double-Take log messages 88
Monitoring the Linux system log 94
E-mailing system messages 105
Statistics 108
Configuring the properties of the statistics file 109
Viewing the statistics file 110
Statistics 112
SNMP 118
Configuring SNMP on your server 119
SNMP traps 121
SNMP statistics 124
Connections 127
Data queues 128
Queuing data 130
Auto-disconnect and auto-reconnect 133
Reconnecting automatically 135
Pausing and resuming target processing 136
Disconnecting a connection 137
Mirroring 138
Stopping, starting, pausing, or resuming mirroring 139
Mirroring automatically 141
Removing orphan files 143
Replication 145
Replication capabilities 146
Replication sets 148
Creating a replication set 150
Creating or modifying replication rules manually 153
Selecting a block device for replication 155
Modifying a replication set 156
Renaming and copying a replication set 157
Calculating replication set size 158
Exporting and importing a replication set 160
Deleting a replication set 161
Starting replication 162
Inserting tasks during replication 163
Verification 164
Verifying manually 165
Verifying on a schedule 166
Configuring the verification log 168
Data transmission 170
Stopping, starting, pausing, and resuming transmission 171
Scheduling data transmission 171
Limiting transmission bandwidth 176
Compressing data for transmission 178
Failover 180
Configuring failover monitoring 181
WAN considerations 184
Protecting NFS exports 186
Protecting Samba shares 187

Contents 4
 Editing failover monitoring configuration 188
Monitoring failover monitoring 189
Failing over 192
Removing failover monitoring configuration 192
Failback and restoration 193
Restoring then failing back 194
Failing back then restoring 199
Server settings 202
Identifying a server 203
Licensing a server 205
Configuring server startup options 208
Configuring network communication properties for a server 210
Queuing data 212
Configuring source data processing options 215
Configuring target data processing options 217
Specifying the Double-Take database storage files 218
Specifying file names for logging and statistics 219
E-mailing system messages 221
Security 224
Logging on and off 225
Chapter 4 Full server protection 227
Full server requirements 228
Creating a full server job 233
Managing and controlling full server jobs 245
Viewing full server job details 252
Validating a full server job 256
Editing a full server job 257
Viewing a full server job log 259
Failing over full server jobs 261
Reversing full server jobs 263
Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 264
Full server to ESX appliance requirements 265
Creating a full server to ESX appliance job 270
Managing and controlling full server to ESX appliance jobs 287
Viewing full server to ESX appliance job details 294
Validating a full server to ESXappliance job 297
Editing a full server to ESX appliance job 298
Viewing a full server to ESX appliance job log 300
Failing over full server to ESX appliance jobs 302

Contents 5
Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview
Double-Take Availability ensures the availability of critical workloads. Using real-time replication and
failover, you can protect data or entire servers, running on physical or virtual servers.
You identify what you want to protect on your production server, known as the source, and replicate that
to a backup server, known as the target. The target server, on a local network or at a remote site, stores
a replica copy of the data from the source. Double-Take monitors any changes to the source and sends
the changes to the replica copy stored on the target server. By replicating only the file changes rather
than copying an entire file, Double-Take allows you to more efficiently use resources.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 6

Core operations
Double-Take performs three basic types of operations.
l Mirroring on page 7The initial copy or subsequent resynchronization of selected data
l Replication on page 8The on-going capture of byte-level file changes
l Failover on page 9The ability to stand-in for a server, in the event of a failure

Mirroring
Mirroring is the process of transmitting user-specified data from the source to the target so that an
identical copy of data exists on the target. When Double-Take initially performs mirroring, it copies all of
the selected data, including file attributes and permissions. Mirroring creates a foundation upon which
Double-Take can efficiently update the target server by replicating only file changes.
If subsequent mirroring operations are necessary, Double-Take can mirror specific files or blocks of
changed data within files. By mirroring only files that have changed, network administrators can expedite
the mirroring of data on the source and target servers. Mirroring has a defined end point when all of the
selected files from the source have been transmitted to the target. When a mirror is complete, the target
contains a copy of the source files at that point in time.

1. Identical files are not mirrored.

2. New files are mirrored.
3. Different files can be mirrored.
4. Checksums can calculate blocks of data to be mirrored.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 7

Replication
Replication is the real-time transmission of file changes. Unlike other related technologies, which are
based on a disk driver or a specific application, the Double-Take replication process operates at the file
system level and is able to track file changes independently from the files related application. In terms of
network resources and time, replicating changes is a more efficient method of maintaining a real-time
copy of data than copying an entire file that has changed.
After a source and target have been connected through Double-Take, file system changes from the
user-defined data set are tracked. Double-Take immediately transmits these file changes to the target
server. This real-time replication keeps the data on the target up-to-date with the source and provides
high availability and disaster recovery with minimal data loss. Unlike mirroring which is complete when
all of the files have been transmitted to the target, replication continuously captures the changes as they
are written to the source. Replication keeps the target up-to-date and synchronized with the source.

1. A user or application updates part of a file.

2. Only the changed portion of the file is replicated to the target.
3. An up-to-date copy of the file is maintained on the target.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 8

Failover
Failover is the process in which a target stands in for a failed source. As a result, user and application
requests that are directed to the failed source are routed to the target.
Double-Take monitors the source status by tracking requests and responses exchanged between the
source and target. When a monitored source does not respond to the target's requests, Double-Take
assumes that the server has failed. Double-Take then prompts the network administrator to initiate
failover, or, if configured, it occurs automatically. The failover target assumes the identity of the failed
source, and user and application requests destined for the source server or its IP address(es) are routed
to the target.
When partnered with the Double-Take data replication capabilities, failover routes user and application
requests with minimal disruption and little or no data loss.

1. User and application requests are sent to the source name or IP address.
2. Data on the source is mirrored and replicated to the target.
3. The target monitors the source for failure.
4. In the event the source fails, the target stands in for the source. User and application requests are
still sent to the source name or IPaddress, which are now running on the target.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 9

Supported configurations
Double-Take is an exceptionally flexible product that can be used in a wide variety of network
configurations. To implement Double-Take effectively, it is important to understand the possible
configuration options and their relative benefits. Double-Take configurations can be used independently
or in varying combinations.

Not all types of jobs support all of these configurations. See the requirements of each job type to
determine which configurations are supported.

l One to one, active/standby on page 11

l One to one, active/active on page 12
l Many to one on page 13
l One to many on page 14
l Chained on page 15
l Single server on page 16

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 10

One to one, active/standby

Description
One target server, having no production activity, is dedicated to support one source
server. The source is the only server actively replicating data.
Applications
l This configuration is appropriate for offsite disaster recovery, failover, and critical
data backup. This is especially appropriate for critical application servers.
l This is the easiest configuration to implement, support, and maintain.
Considerations
l This configuration requires the highest hardware cost because a target server is
required for every source server.
l You must pause the target when backing up database files on the target.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 11

One to one, active/active

Description
Each server acts as both a source and target actively replicating data to each other
Applications
This configuration is appropriate for failover and critical data backup. This configuration
is more cost-effective than the Active/Standby configuration because there is no need
to buy a dedicated target server for each source. In this case, both servers can do full-
time production work.
Considerations
l Coordination of the configuration of Double-Take and other applications can be
more complex than the one to one active/standby configuration.
l During replication, each server must continue to process its normal workload.
l Administrators must avoid selecting a target destination path that is included in the
sources protected data set. Any overlap will cause an infinite loop.
l To support the production activities of both servers during failover without reducing
performance, each server should have sufficient disk space and processing
resources.
l Failover and failback scripts must be implemented to avoid conflict with the existing
production applications.
l You must pause the target when backing up database files on the target.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 12

Many to one

Description
Many source servers are protected by one target server.
Applications
This configuration is appropriate for offsite disaster recovery. This is also an excellent
choice for providing centralized tape backup because it spreads the cost of one target
server among many source servers.
Considerations
l The target server must be carefully managed. It must have enough disk space and
RAM to support replication from all of the source systems. The target must be able
to accommodate traffic from all of the servers simultaneously.
l If using failover, scripts must be coordinated to ensure that, in the event that the
target server stands in for a failed server, applications will not conflict.
l You must pause the target when backing up database files on the target.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 13

One to many

Description
One source server sends data to multiple target servers. The target servers may or
may not be accessible by one another.
Applications
This configuration provides offsite disaster recovery, redundant backups, and data
distribution. For example, this configuration can replicate all data to a local target server
and separately replicate a subset of the mission-critical data to an offsite disaster
recovery server.
Considerations
l Updates are transmitted multiple times across the network. If one of the target
servers is on a WAN, the source server is burdened with WAN communications.
l You must pause the target when backing up database files on the target.
l If you failover to one of the targets, the other targets stop receiving updates.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 14

Chained

Description
The source servers sends replicated data to a target server, which acts as a source
server and sends data to a final target server, which is often offsite.
Applications
This is a convenient approach for integrating local high availability with offsite disaster
recovery. This configuration moves the processing burden of WAN communications
from the source server to the target/source server. After failover in a one to one, many
to one, or one to many configuration, the data on the target is no longer protected. This
configuration allows failover from the first source to the middle machine, with the third
machine still protecting the data.
Considerations
l The target/source server could become a single point of failure for offsite data
protection.
l You must pause the target when backing up database files on the target.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 15

Single server

Description
Source and target components are loaded on the same server allowing data to be
replicated from one location to another on the same volume or to a separate volume on
the same server. These could be locally attached SCSI drives or Fibre Channel based
SAN devices.
Applications
This configuration is useful upgrading storage hardware while leaving an application
online. Once the data is mirrored, you can swap the drive in the disk manager. If the
source and target copies of the data are located on different drives, this configuration
supports high availability of the data in the event that the source hard drive fails.
Considerations
l This configuration does not provide high availability for the entire server.
l This configuration must be configured carefully so that an infinite loop is not created.

Chapter 1 Double-Take Availability overview 16

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients
Double-Take Availability for Linux has different clients for different job types.
l Files and folders jobsFiles and folders jobs will use the Replication Console and the Failover
Control Center to control and manage your connections and failover. These client installations are
not detailed in the Double-Take Installation, Licensing, and Activation document. You can install
these clients by selecting the Install Double-Take for Linux Management Client link from the
installation landing page. Follow the on-screen installation instructions. After the installation is
complete, both clients can be started from the Windows Start menu. You can also launch the
Failover Control Center from the Tools menu in the Replication Console. Linux files and folders
jobs can also use a Double-Take DTCL scripting language to control and manage connections
and failover. For more information, see the Double-Take DTCL Scripting Guide.
l Replication Console on page 18

l Failover Control Center on page 21

l Full server and full server to ESX appliance jobsFull server and full server to ESX
appliance jobs use the Double-Take Console to control and manage the jobs and failover. This
client installation is detailed in the Double-Take Installation, Licensing, and Activation document.
After the installation is complete, the console can be started from the Windows Start menu. Linux
full server and full server to ESX appliance jobs can also use the Double-Take PowerShell
scripting to control and manage these jobs types. For more information, see the Double-Take
PowerShell Scripting Guide.
l Double-Take Console on page 23

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 17

Replication Console
Start the Double-Take Replication Console by selecting Start, Programs, Double-Take for Linux,
Double-Take Replication Console.
From the Replication Console, you can manage, monitor, and control your Double-Take connections.
The Replication Console is a two pane view. The views in the panes change depending on what is
highlighted. For example, when the root of the tree in the left pane is selected, all of the machines in your
environment running Double-Take are displayed in the right pane. If you expand the tree in the left pane
and select a server, any connections for that server are displayed in the right pane.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 18

Using Replication Console workspaces
The Replication Console workspace contains the display of the panes of the Replication Console and
any servers that may have been inserted. Multiple workspaces can be used to help organize your
environment or to view settings from another machine.
l Saving a workspaceAs you size, add, or remove windows in the Replication Console, you
can save the workspace to use later or use on another Double-Take client machine. Select File
and one of the following options.
l Save WorkspaceSave the current workspace. If you have not previously saved this
workspace, you must specify a name for this workspace.
l Save Workspace AsPrompt for a new name when saving the current workspace.
l Opening a workspaceFrom the Replication Console, you can open a new workspace or open
a previously saved workspace. Select File and one of the following options.
l New WorkspaceOpen an untitled workspace with the default Double-Take window settings.
l Open WorkspaceOpen a previously saved workspace.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 19

Clearing stored security credentials
Use the following steps to remove credentials cached in the Replication Console.
1. To access the credentials security option, select File, Options and select the Security tab.

2. To remove the security credentials, click Clear Cached Security Credentials.

3. Click OK.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 20

Failover Control Center
From the Failover Control Center, you can manage, monitor, and control failover for your Double-Take
servers. The Failover Control Center displays a main window for monitoring failover activity. Control
buttons to the right allow you to configure and manage your servers.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 21

Setting the frequency of Failover Control Center console
refreshes
The failover client periodically requests information from the source and target. Depending on the type of
information, the request may be a machine-specific request, like obtaining the Time to Fail status from
a target, or may be a general request, like determining which machines are running Double-Take.
The rate at which these requests are made can be modified through the Failover Control Center refresh
rate dialog box. Select Settings, Refresh Rate. The default update interval is one second. A lower
refresh rate value updates the information in the Failover Control Center window's Monitored
Machines tree more often, but also generates more network traffic and higher utilization on the client
and target machines. A higher refresh rate value updates the information less frequently, but minimizes
the network traffic.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 22

Double-Take Console
After you have installed the console, you can launch it by selecting Double-Take, Double-Take
Console from your Programs, All Programs, or Apps, depending on your operating system.
The Double-Take Console is used to protect and monitor your servers and jobs. Each time you open the
Double-Take Console, you start at the Home page. This page provides a high-level overview of the
status of your jobs.
The appearance of the Home page is the same for all users. However, other console pages may have
variances in the appearance depending on the Double-Take products that you have installed, the
Double-Take license keys on your servers, and the type of job you are working with.

l HeadlinesThe top section gives a quick overview of any jobs that require attention as well as
providing quick access buttons.
l These jobs require attentionAny jobs that require attention (those in an error state)

are listed. You will see the source and target server names listed, as well as a short
description of the issue that requires your attention. If the list is blank, there are no jobs that
require immediate attention.
l ToolsSelect this drop-down list to launch other Vision Solutions consoles.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 23

 l Servers SummaryThe middle section summarizes the servers in your console.
l Total number of serversThis field displays the number of servers that you have been

added to the console.

l View all serversSelect this link to go to the Manage Servers page where you can view,

edit, add, remove, or manage the servers in your console. See Managing servers on page
29.
l Jobs SummaryThe bottom section summarizes the jobs in your console.
l Total number of jobsThis field displays the number of jobs running on the servers in

your console.
l View jobs with errorsSelect this link to go to the Manage Jobs page, where the

Filter: Jobs with errors will automatically be applied.

l View jobs with warningsSelect this link to go to the Manage Jobs page, where the

Filter: Jobs with warnings will automatically be applied.

l View all jobsSelect this link to go to the Manage Jobs page and view all jobs.

At the bottom of the Double-Take Console, you will see a status bar. At the right side, you will find links
for Jobs with warnings and Jobs with errors. This lets you see quickly, no matter which page of the
console you are on, if you have any jobs that need your attention. Select this link to go to the Manage
Jobs page, where the appropriate Filter: Jobs with warnings or Filter: Jobs with errors will
automatically be applied.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 24

Double-Take Console requirements
You must meet the following requirements for the Double-Take Console.
l Operating systemThe Double-Take Console can be run from a Windows source or target. It
can also be run from a 32-bit or 64-bit physical or virtual machine running Windows 8, Windows 7,
Windows Vista, or Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later.
l Microsoft .NET FrameworkMicrosoft .NET Framework version 4.0 Update 3 or later is
required. (The full .NET 4.0.3 is required, not just the Client Profile.)
l Screen resolutionFor best results, use a 1024x768 or higher screen resolution.

The Double-Take installation prohibits the console from being installed on Server Core.
Because Windows 2012 allows you to switch back and forth between Server Core and a full
installation, you may have the console files available on Server Core, if you installed Double-
Take while running in full operating system mode. In any case, you cannot run the Double-Take
Console on Server Core.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 25

Console options
There are several options that you can set that are specific to the Double-Take Console. To access
these console options, select Options from the toolbar.
l MonitoringThis section is used to determine how the console monitors your Double-Take
servers.
l Monitoring intervalSpecifies how often, in seconds, the console refreshes the
monitoring data. The servers will be polled at the specified interval for information to refresh
the console.
l Automatic retryThis option will have the console automatically retry server login

credentials, after the specified retry interval, if the server login credentials are not accepted.
Keep in mind the following caveats when using this option.
l This is only for server credentials, not job credentials.

l A set of credentials provided for or used by multiple servers will not be retried for the

specified retry interval on any server if it fails on any of the servers using it.
l Verify your environment's security policy when using this option. Check your policies

for failed login lock outs and resets. For example, if your policy is to reset the failed
login attempt count after 30 minutes, set this auto-retry option to the same or a
slightly larger value as the 30 minute security policy to decrease the chance of a
lockout.
l Restarting the Double-Take Console will automatically initiate an immediate login.

l Entering new credentials will initiate an immediate login using the new credentials.

l Retry on this intervalIf you have enabled the automatic retry, specify the length of time,

in minutes, to retry the login.

l Server CommunicationThis section is used to determine how the console communicates
with your Double-Take servers.
lDefault port for XML web services protocolSpecifies the port that the console will
use when sending and receiving data to Double-Take servers. By default, the port is 6325.
Changes to the console port will not take effect until the console is restarted.
l Default port for legacy protocolIf you are using an older Double-Take version, you

will need to use the legacy protocol port. This applies to Double-Take versions 5.1 or
earlier.
l DiagnosticsThis section assists with console troubleshooting.
lExport Diagnostic DataThis button creates a raw data file that can be used for
debugging errors in the Double-Take Console. Use this button as directed by technical
support.
l View Log FileThis button opens the Double-Take Console log file. Use this button as

directed by technical support. You can also select View, View Console Log File to open
the Double-Take Console log file.
l View Data FileThis button opens the Double-Take Console data file. Use this button as

directed by technical support. You can also select View, View Console Data File to open
the Double-Take Console data file.
l Automatic UpdatesThis section is for automatically updating your console.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 26

 l Automatically check for updatesBy default, each time the console is started, it will
automatically check the Vision Solutions web site to see if there is updated console
software available. If there is updated console software available, an Automatic Updates
section will appear on the Home page. Click Get the latest update to download and install
the updated console software.
If you want to disable the automatic check for updates, click Change automatic updates
or select Options from the toolbar. On the Options page, deselect Automatically check
for updates to disable the automatic check.
You can also manually check for updates by selecting Help, Check for Updates.
Update availableIf there is an update available, click Get Update. The dialog box
l

will close and your web browser will open to the Vision Solutions web site where you
can download and install the update.
l No update availableIf you are using the most recent console software, that will

be indicated. Click Close.

l No connection availableIf the console cannot contact the update server of if

there is an error, the console will report that information. The console log contains a
more detailed explanation of the error. Click Check using Browser if you want to
open your browser to check for console software updates. You will need to use your
browser if your Internet access is through a proxy server.
l License InventoryThis section controls if the console contains a license inventory. This
feature may not appear in your console if your service provider has restricted access to it.
l Enable license inventoryThis option allows you to use this console to manage the
Double-Take licenses assigned to your organization. When this option is enabled, the
Manage License Inventory page is also enabled.
l Default Installation OptionsAll of the fields under the Default Installation Options section
are used by the push installation on the Install page. The values specified here will be the default
options used for the push installation.
l Activate online after install completesSpecify if you want to activate your Double-
Take licenses at the end of the installation. The activation requires Internet access from the
console machine or the machine you are installing to. Activation will be attempted from the
console machine first and if that fails, it wil be attempted from the machine you are installing
to. If you choose not to have the installation activate your licenses, you will have to activate
them through the console license inventory or the server's properties page.
l Location of install foldersSpecify the parent directory location where the installation
files are located. The parent directory can be local on your console machine or a UNC path.
l WindowsSpecify the parent directory where the Windows installation file is

located. The default location is where the Double-Take Console is installed, which is
\Program Files\Vision Solutions\Double-Take. The console will automatically use the
\i386 subdirectory for 32-bit installations and the \x64 subdirectory for 64-bit
installations. These subdirectories are automatically populated with the Windows
installation files when you installed the console. If you want to use a different location,
you must copy the \i386 or \x64 folder and its installation file to the different parent
directory that you specify.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 27

 l LinuxFor Linux servers, you have two choices.
l If you copied the Linux installation files from your download to your Double-

Take Console installation location, you must make sure they are in a \Linux
subdirectory under the parent directory you specified for Location of install
folders. Copy the Linux .deb or .rpm files from your download to the \Linux
subdirectory. Make sure you only have a single version of the Linux installation
files in that location. The push installation cannot determine which version to
install if there are multiple versions in the \Linux subdirectory.
l If you have already deployed your Linux virtual recovery appliance, specify the

UNC path to the installers share on the appliance. For example, if your
appliance is called DTAppliance, use the path \\DTAppliance\installers for the
Location of install folders. The console will automatically use the
installation files in the \Linux subdirectory of this share location.
l Default Windows Installation OptionsAll of the fields under the Default Installation
Options section are used by the push installation on the Install page. The values specified here
will be the default options used for the push installation.
l Temporary folder for installation packageSpecify a temporary location on the server
where you are installing Double-Take where the installation files will be copied and run.
l Installation folderSpecify the location where you want to install Double-Take on each

server. This field is not used if you are upgrading an existing version of Double-Take. In that
case, the existing installation folder will be used.
l Queue folderSpecify the location where you want to store the Double-Take disk queue

on each server.
l Amount of system memory to useSpecify the maximum amount of memory, in MB,

that can be used for Double-Take processing.

l Minimum free disk spaceThis is the minimum amount of disk space in the specified

Queue folder that must be available at all times. This amount should be less than the
amount of physical disk space minus the disk size specified for Limit disk space for
queue.
l Do not use disk queueThis option will disable disk queuing. When system memory has

been exhausted, Double-Take will automatically begin the auto-disconnect process.

l Unlimited disk queueDouble-Take will use an unlimited amount of disk space in the

specified Queue folder for disk queuing, which will allow the queue usage to automatically
expand whenever the available disk space expands. When the available disk space has
been used, Double-Take will automatically begin the auto-disconnect process.
l Limit disk space for queueThis option will allow you to specify a fixed amount of disk

space, in MB, in the specified Queue folder that can be used for Double-Take disk
queuing. When the disk space limit is reached, Double-Take will automatically begin the
auto-disconnect process.
l Default Linux Installation OptionsAll of the fields under the Default Installation Options
section are used by the push installation on the Install page. The values specified here will be the
default options used for the push installation.
l Temporary folder for installation packageSpecify a temporary location on the server
where you are installing Double-Take where the installation files will be copied and run.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 28

Managing servers
To manage the servers in your console, select Manage Servers from the toolbar. The Manage
Servers page allows you to view, edit, add, remove, or manage the servers in your console.
You can also organize the servers that are in your console into groups, allowing you to filter the servers
you are viewing based on your organization. The servers displayed in the right pane depend on the
server group folder selected in the left pane. Every server in your console session is displayed when the
All Servers group is selected. If you have created and populated server groups under My Servers,
then only the servers in the selected group will displayed in the right pane.

If you have uninstalled and reinstalled Double-Take on a server, you may see the server twice
on the Manage Servers page because the reinstall assigns a new unique identifier to the
server. One of the servers (the original version) will show with the red X icon. You can safely
remove that server from the console.

Right pane display

The following table identifies the columns displayed in the right pane of the Manage Servers page.

Column 1 (Blank)
The first blank column indicates the machine type.

Double-Take source or target server which could be a physical server, virtual

machine, or a cluster node

Double-Take source or target server which is a Windows cluster

VMware server which could be a vCenter server or an ESX or ESXi host.

Double-Take controller appliance

Double-Take replication appliance

Double-Take Reporting Service server

Offline server which means the console cannot communicate with this machine.

Server error which means the console can communicate with the machine, but it
cannot communicate with Double-Take on it.
Column 2 (Blank)
The second blank column indicates the security level

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 29

 ProcessingThe console is attempting to communicate with machine.

Administrator accessThis level grants full control.

Monitor only accessThis level grants monitoring privileges only.
No security accessThis level does not allow monitoring or control.
Server
The name or IPaddress of the server. If you have specified a reservedIPaddress, it
will be displayed in parenthesis.
Activity
There are many different Activity messages that keep you informed of the server
activity. Most of the activity messages are informational and do not require any
administrator interaction. If you see error messages, check the server details. See
Viewing server details on page 38.
Version
The product version information
Licensing Status
The status of the license on the server. If your license is expired, any jobs using that
server will be in an error state.
Product
The Double-Take products licensed for the server or the Double-Take role for the
server.
License Key
The license keys associated with the products licensed for the server. If your license is
not valid for the operating system on your server, the license key will be identified as
Invalid License Key. There will be no license key listed for those servers that are not
licensed, like a VMware server.
Serial Number
The serial number associated with the license key

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 30

Main toolbar and right-click menu
The following options are available on the main toolbar of the Manage Servers page and the right-click
menu. Some of the options are only available in the right-click menu. Some options are only available for
a single selected server and others are available for multiple selected servers.

Add Servers
Adds a new server. This button leaves the Manage Servers page and opens the Add
Servers page. See Adding servers on page 34.

Add Replication Appliance

Adds a new replication appliance. This option is only valid for agentless vSphere
protection.

View Server Details

Views detailed information about a server. This button leaves the Manage Servers
page and opens the View Server Details page. See Viewing server details on page
38.

Remove Server
Removes the server from the console.

Provide Credentials
Changes the login credentials that the Double-Take Console use to authenticate to a
server. This button opens the Provide Credentials dialog box where you can specify
the new account information. See Providing server credentials on page 37. You will
remain on the Manage Servers page after updating the server credentials.

Manage Group Assignments

Allows you to assign, move, and remove the selected server from specific server
groups. This buttons opens the Manage Group Assignments dialog box where you can
assign and unassign the server to specific server groups. The server will appear in
server groups marked with a checkmark, and will not appear in groups without a
checkmark. Servers assigned to a server group will automatically appear in parent
server groups.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 31

Install
Installs or upgrades Double-Take on the selected server. This button opens the Install
page where you can specify installation options.

Uninstall
Uninstalls Double-Take on the selected server.

Copy
Copies the information for the selected servers. You can then paste the server
information as needed. Each server is pasted on a new line, with the server information
being comma-separated.

Paste
Pastes a new-line separated list of servers into the console. Your copied list of servers
must be entered on individual lines with only server names or IP addresses on each
line.

View Server Events

The option is not available for Linux sources or appliances.

View Server Logs

Views the Double-Take logs messages for a server. This button opens the Logs
window. This separate window allows you to continue working in the Double-Take
Console while monitoring log messages. You can open multiple logging windows for
multiple servers. When the Double-Take Console is closed, all logging windows will
automatically close.

Activate Online
Activates licenses and applies the activation keys to servers in one step. You must have
Internet access for this process. You will not be able to activate a license that has
already been activated.

Gather Support Diagnostics

Executes the diagnostic DTInfo utility which collects configuration data for use when
reporting problems to technical support. It gathers Double-Take log files; Double-Take
and system settings; network configuration information such as IP, WINS, and DNS
addresses; and other data which may be necessary for technical support to
troubleshoot issues. You will be prompted for a location to save the resulting file which
is created with the information gathered. Because this utility is gathering several pieces
of information, across the network to your console machine, it may take several

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 32

 minutes to complete the information gathering and sending the resulting file to the
console machine.

View Replication Service Details

Views the replication service details for a server. This option is not applicable to Linux
source servers or appliances.

Refresh
Refreshes the status of the selected servers.

Overflow Chevron
Displays any toolbar buttons that are hidden from view when the window size is
reduced.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 33

Adding servers
The first time you start the console, the Manage Servers page is empty. In order to protect and monitor
your servers, you must insert your servers and/or appliances in the console.

Inserting servers manually

1. Select Get Started from the toolbar.
2. Select Add servers and click Next.
3. On the Manual Entry tab, specify the server information.
l ServerThis is the name or IPaddress of the server or appliance to be added to the

console. See the following NAT configuration section if you have a NAT environment.
l User nameFor a server, specify a user that is a member of the dtadmin or dtmon

security group on the server.

l PasswordSpecify the password associated with the User name you entered.

l DomainIf you are working in a domain environment, specify the Domain.

4. After you have specified the server or appliance information, click Add.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for any other servers or appliances you want to add.
6. If you need to remove servers or appliances from the list of Servers to be added, highlight a
server and click Remove. You can also remove all of them with the Remove All button.
7. When your list of Servers to be added is complete, click OK.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 34

 NATconfiguration
If you are going to create a full server job without reverse protection or a full server to
ESXappliance job, then your servers can be in a NATenvironment.
The name or IP address you use to add a server or appliance to the console is dependent on
where you are running the console. Use the following table to determine what name or IP
address to enter depending on the location where you are running the console.

In this table, public addresses are those addresses that are publicly available when a
server is behind a NATrouter. Private addresses are those addresses that are privately
available when a server is behind a NATrouter. An address that is not labeled as public or
private are for servers that are not behind a NAT router. This is generally a public address
but is not named as such in this table to try to more clearly identify when a public NAT
address needs to be used.

Location of source How to add the source and

Location of Double-Take
and target/appliance to the
Console
target/appliance Double-Take Console

specify the public IPaddress of the

source (which is the public IP
and your Double-Take Console address of the source's NATrouter)
is located behind the NAT router and the public IP address of the
with the source, target/appliance (which is the public
IP address of the
target's/appliance's NATrouter).

If your source and specify the public IP address of the

target/appliance are and your Double-Take Console source (which is the public IP
behind individual is located behind the NAT router address of the source's NATrouter)
NAT routers, with the target/appliance, and the name or private IPaddress
of the target/appliance.

and your Double-Take Console specify the public IP address of the

is located between the two source (which is the public IP
NATrouters, address of the source's NATrouter)
and the public IP address of the
and your Double-Take Console target/appliance (which is the public
is located behind a third NAT IP address of the
router, target's/appliance's NAT router).

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 35

 specify the public IP address of the
and your Double-Take Console source (which is the public IP
is located behind the NAT router address of the source's NAT router)
If your source is with the source, and the name or IPaddress of the
behind a NATrouter target/appliance.
but your
target/appliance is specify the public IPaddress of the
not, and your Double-Take Console source (which is the public IP
is located on the target/appliance address of the source's NAT router)
network, and the name or IPaddress of the
target/appliance.
and your Double-Take Console specify the name or IP address of
is located behind the NAT router the source and the name or private
If your with the target/appliance, IPaddress of the target/appliance.
target/appliance is
behind a NATrouter specify the name or IPaddress of
but your source is the source and the public
and your Double-Take Console
not, IPaddress of the target/appliance
is located on the source network,
(which is the public address of the
target's/appliance's NATrouter).
specify the name or private IP
If your source and
address of the source and the public
target/appliance are and your Double-Take Console
IP address of the target/appliance
both behind a single is located outside of the router,
(which is the public address of the
NATrouter,
target's/appliance's NATrouter).

Importing and exporting servers from a server and group configuration file
You can share the console server and group configuration between machines that have the Double-
Take Console installed. The console server configuration includes the server group configuration, server
name, server communications ports, and other internal processing information.
To export a server and group configuration file, select File, Export Servers. Specify a file name and
click Save. After the configuration file is exported, you can import it to another console.
When you are importing a console server and group configuration file from another console, you will not
lose or overwrite any servers that already exist in the console. For example, if you have server alpha in
your console and you insert a server configuration file that contains servers alpha and beta, only the
server beta will be inserted. Existing group names will not be merged, so you may see duplicate server
groups that you will have to manually update as desired.
To import a server and group configuration file, select File, Import Servers. Locate the console
configuration file saved from the other machine and click Open.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 36

Providing server credentials
To update the security credentials used for a specific server, select Provide Credentials from the
toolbar on the Manage Servers page. When prompted, specify the User name, Password, and
Domain of the account you want to use for this server. Click OK to save the changes.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 37

Viewing server details
Highlight a server on the Manage Servers page and click View Server Details from the toolbar. The
View Server Details page allows you to view details about that particular server. The server details
vary depending on the type of server or appliance you are viewing.

Server name
The name or IPaddress of the server. If you have specified a reservedIPaddress, it
will be displayed in parenthesis.
Operating system
The server's operating system version
Roles
The role of this server in your Double-Take environment. In some cases, a server can
have more than one role.
l Engine RoleSource or target server
l Image Repository RoleA target for a DR protection job or a source for a
DRrecovery job
l Controller RoleController appliance for an agentless vSphere job
l Replication Appliance RoleReplication appliance for an agentless vSphere job
l Reporting ServiceDouble-Take Reporting Service server
Status
There are many different Status messages that keep you informed of the server
activity. Most of the status messages are informational and do not require any
administrator interaction. If you see error messages, check the rest of the server
details.
Activity
There are many different Activity messages that keep you informed of the server
activity. Most of the activity messages are informational and do not require any
administrator interaction. If you see error messages, check the rest of the server
details.
Connected via
The IP address and port the server is using for communcations. You will also see the
Double-Take protocol being used to communicate with server. The protocol will be
XML web services protocol (for servers running Double-Take version 5.2 or later) or
Legacy protocol (for servers running version 5.1 or earlier).
Version
The product version information

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 38

Access
The security level granted to the specified user
User name
The user account used to access the server
Licensing
Licensing information for the server

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 39

Editing server properties
Highlight a server on the Manage Servers page and click View Server Details from the toolbar. Under
Tasks, select Edit server properties. The Edit Server Properties page allows you to view and edit
properties for that server. Click on a heading on the Edit Server Properties page to expand or collapse
a section of properties.
l Server licensing on page 41Views, adds, and removes license keys

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 40

Server licensing

Licensing identifies your Double-Take license keys.

The fields and buttons in the Licensing section will vary depending on your Double-Take
Console configuration and the type of license keys you are using.

l Add license keys and activation keysYour license key or activation key is a 24 character,
alpha-numeric key. You can change your license key without reinstalling, if your license changes.
To add a license key or activation key, type in the key or click Choose from inventory and select
a key from your console's license inventory. Then click Add.

The license inventory feature cannot be enabled if your service provider has restricted
access to it.

l Current license keysThe server's current license key information is displayed. To remove a

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 41

 key, highlight it and click Remove. To copy a key, highlight it and click Copy.

If you are replacing an existing license key that has already been activated, you must
remove both the old license key and the old activation key. Then you can add a new
license key and activate it successfully. If you are updating an existing license key, do not
remove the old license key or old activation key. Add the new license key on top of the
existing license key.

l ActivationIf your license key needs to be activated, you will see an additional Activation
section at the bottom of the Licensing section. To activate your key, use one of the following
procedures.
l Activate onlineIf you have Internet access, you can activate your license and apply the
activated license to the server in one step by selecting Activate Online.

You will not be able to activate a license that has already been activated.

l Obtain activation key online, then activateIf you have Internet access, click the
hyperlink in the Activation section to take you to the web so that you can submit your
activation information. Complete and submit the activation form, and you will receive an e-
mail with the activation key. Activate your server by entering the activation key in the Add
license keys and activations keys field and clicking Add.
l Obtain activation key offline, then activateIf you do not have Internet access, go to

https://activate.doubletake.com from another machine that has Internet access. Complete

and submit the activation form, and you will receive an e-mail with the activation key.
Activate your server by entering the activation key in the Add license keys and
activations keys field and clicking Add.
The activation key is specific to this server. It cannot be used on any other server. If the activation
key and server do not match, Double-Take will not run.

If your Double-Take Availability license keys needs to be activated, you will have 14 days
to do so.

If you need to rename a server that already has a Double-Take license applied to it, you
should deactivate that license before changing the server name. That includes rebuilding
a server or changing the case (capitalization) of the server name (upper or lower case or
any combination of case). If you have already rebuilt the server or changed the server
name or case, you will have to perform a host-transfer to continue using that license.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 42

Viewing server logs
You can view the engine and Management Service logs using either of these two methods.
l On the Manage Servers page, highlight a server in the list and click View Server Logs from the
toolbar.
l On the Manage Jobs page, right-click a job and select View Logs. Select either the source
server log or the target server log.
Separate logging windows allow you to continue working in the Double-Take Console while monitoring
log messages. You can open multiple logging windows for multiple servers. When the Double-Take
Console is closed, all logging windows will automatically close.

The following table identifies the controls and the table columns in the Server logs window.

Start
This button starts the addition and scrolling of new messages in the window.

Pause
This button pauses the addition and scrolling of new messages in the window. This is
only for the Server logs window. The messages are still logged to their respective files
on the server.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 43

Copy
This button copies the messages selected in the Server logs window to the Windows
clipboard.

Clear
This button clears the Server logs window. The messages are not cleared from the
respective files on the server. If you want to view all of the messages again, close and
reopen the Server logs window.
Filter
From the drop-down list, you can select to view all log messages or only those
messages from the Double-Take engine or the Double-Take Management Service.
Time
This column in the table indicates the date and time when the message was logged.
Description
This column in the table displays the actual message that was logged.
Service
This column in the table indicates if the message is from the Double-Take engine or the
Double-Take Management Service.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 44

Managing VMware servers
To manage your VMware servers, select Go, Manage VMware Servers. The Manage VMware
Server page allows you to view, add, remove, or edit credentials for your VMware servers available in
the console.

VMware Server
The name of the VMware server
Full Name
The full name of the VMware server
User Name
The user account being used to access the VMware server

Add VMware Server

Add a new VMware server. When prompted, specify the VMware server and a user
account.
Because of increased security of the cipher strengths introduced in vSphere 5.1, you
will be unable to access VMware servers running version 5.1 or later if your Double-
Take Console is running on Windows XP. If you are running the console on Windows
2003, you will have to apply the hotfix in the knowledgebase article 948963. See
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/948963. Other Windows operating systems (Vista,
Server 2008 and later) have the proper cipher strength built into the operating system.

Remove Server
Remove the VMware server from the console.

Provide Credentials
Edit credentials for the selected VMware server. When prompted, specify a user
account to access the VMware server.

Chapter 2 Double-Take clients 45

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection
Create a files and folders job when you want to protect data. You can also use it to protect applications,
such as Oracle or MySQL, however you will need to use your own customized failover and failback
scripts to start and stop services during failover and failback. This job type does not protect a server's
system state. Use the following links to access information and steps specific to files and folder
protection.
l Files and folders requirements on page 47
l DTSetup menus on page 62
l Data protection on page 63
l Protection monitoring on page 76
l Connections on page 127
l Mirroring on page 138
l Replication on page 145
l Verification on page 164
l Data transmission on page 170
l Failover on page 180
l Failback and restoration on page 193
l Server settings on page 202
l Security on page 224

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 46

Files and folders requirements
Each Double-Take server must meet minimum requirements. Verify that each server meets the
requirements for the function of that machine. Additionally, the machine where you will be running the
console must also meet some basic requirements.
l Source and target server requirements on page 47
l Console requirements on page 49

Source and target server requirements

l Operating systemMake sure your servers meet the operating system, kernel, and file system
requirements.
l Operating systemRed Hat Enterprise Linux, Oracle Enterprise Linux, and CentOS
l Version5.9 through 5.11

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen, PAE

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen

l File systemExt3, Ext4 (except on version 5.11), XFS

l NotesOracle Enterprise Linux support is for the mainline kernel only, not the

Unbreakable kernel.
l Operating systemRed Hat Enterprise Linux, Oracle Enterprise Linux, and CentOS
l Version6.4 through 6.6

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault

l File systemExt3, Ext4, XFS (64-bit only)

l NotesOracle Enterprise Linux support includes the mainline kernel only for

version 6.3 and includes both the mainline kernel and the Unbreakable kernel for
versions 6.4 and 6.5.
l Operating systemSUSELinux Enterprise
l Version10.3 and 10.4

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, BigSMP, Xen,

XenPAE
l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen

l File systemExt3, ReiserFS, XFS

l Operating systemSUSELinux Enterprise

l Version11.2 through 11.3

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, Xen, XenPAE, VMI

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, Xen

l File systemExt3, ReiserFS, XFS

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 47

 l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version10.04.3

l Kernel version2.6.32-33

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architectures386, Generic, Generic-pae

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric, Preempt, Server

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version10.04.4

l Kernel version2.6.32-38

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architectures386, Generic, Generic-pae

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric, Preempt, Server

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version12.04.2

l Kernel version3.5.0-23

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesGeneric

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version12.04.3

l Kernel version3.8.0-29

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesGeneric

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

For all operating systems except Ubuntu, the kernel version must match the
expected kernel for the specified release version. For example, if /etc/redhat-
release declares the system to be a Redhat 5.10 system, the kernel that is installed
must match that.

Double-Take does not support stacking filesystems, like eCryptFS.

You must have sshd (or the package that installs sshd), lsb, parted,
/usr/sbin/dmidecode, and /usr/bin/which on your Linux servers before you can
install and use Double-Take Availability. See your operating system documentation
for details on these packages and utilities.

l System MemoryThe minimum system memory on each server should be 1 GB. The
recommended amount for each server is 2 GB.
l Disk UsageThe amount of disk space required for the Double-Take program files is
approximately 85 MB. About 45 MB will be located on your /(root) partition, and the remainder will
be on your /usr partition. You will need to verify that you have additional disk space for Double-
Take queuing, logging, and so on. Additionally, on a target server, you need sufficient disk space
to store the replicated data from all connected sources, allowing additional space for growth.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 48

 l ProtocolsYour servers must have TCP/IP. IPv4 is the only supported version.
l NATsupportFiles and folders jobs can support NAT environments in an IP-forwarding
configuration with one to one port mappings. Port-forwarding is not supported. Make sure you
have added your servers to the Double-Take Console using the correct IP address.
l PortsPort 1501 is used for localhost communication. Ports 1500, 1505, 1506, 6325, and 6326
are used for component communication and must be opened on any firewall that might be in use.
l IP address and subnet configurationBecause of limitations in the way the Linux kernel
handles IP address aliases, do not mix subnets on the eth0 network interface. Failover should not
cause problems in this configuration, but you will lose IP addresses during failback. Therefore, if
you must mix subnets on a single interface, use eth1 or higher.
l Name resolutionYour servers must have name resolution or DNS. The Replication Console
and interactive text client (DTCL -i) will fail if there is no DNS entryor way for a server to resolve
server names. For details on name resolution options, see your Linux documentation or online
Linux resources.
l SecurityDouble-Take security is granted through membership in user groups. The groups can
be local or LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). A user must provide a valid local
account that is a member of the Double-Take security groups.
l SELinux policySELinux should be disabled on the source and target.
l VMware ToolsAny VMWare guest running Double-Take should have the appropriate
VMWare Tools package installed.
l Hard linksIf you have hard links outside of the data set you are protecting, and they link to files
inside the data set you are protecting, Double-Take will not mirror or replicate the hard links which
could lead to differences on the target.

Console requirements
The Replication Console can be run on any of the following operating systems.
l Windows 2008
l Windows 2003
l Windows 7
l Windows Vista
l Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 49

DTSetup
DTSetup is a menu-driven application that provides easy access to Double-Take server configuration.
Select a link for more information on DTSetup configuration tasks.
l Running DTSetup on page 51This topic includes instructions for launching DTSetup.
l Setup tasks on page 52The setup tasks allow you to configure license keys, security groups,
block device replication configuration, server configuration, and driver performance settings.
l Starting and stopping the daemon on page 59Built-in scripts allow you to quickly and easily start
and stop the Double-Take daemon.
l Starting DTCL on page 60You can launch the Double-Take interactive command prompt which
allows you to enter DTCL commands one at a time.
l Viewing documentation and troubleshooting tools on page 61DTSetup provides easy access to
Double-Take log files, a diagnostic collection tool, and several legal documents.
l DTSetup menus on page 62This topic includes a list overview of the DTSetup menu system.
Reference the links in the list for complete details on completing tasks in DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 50

Running DTSetup
1. Run the DTSetup command from the shell prompt to start DTSetup. The command is case-
sensitive.

Do not run DTSetup using the sudo command. Use a real root shell to launch DTSetup
instead, either by logging in as root on the console or by using the login session of a non-
privileged user to run su - to start a root shell.

2. The first time you run DTSetup after an installation, you will be prompted to review the Vision
Solutions license agreement. Review the agreement and accept the terms of agreement by typing
yes. You cannot use Double-Take without agreeing to the licensing terms.
3. When the DTSetup menu appears, enter the number of the menu option you want to access.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 51

Setup tasks
The setup tasks are generally configured once. Select a link below to learn more about that setup task.
l Activating your server on page 53License keys and activate keys license and activate your
Double-Take servers.
l Modifying security groups on page 54Security groups provide access to Double-Take.
l Configuring block device replication on page 55Block device replication uses a loop device to
capture data changes at the block level. Data selection is at the volume level. Generally, this
replication configuration is ideal for non-file system type data, like raw databases.
l Configuring server settings on page 57If desired, you can modify server settings through the
Double-Take configuration file.
l Configuring driver performance settings on page 58If desired, you can specify Double-Take
driver performance settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 52

Activating your server
Before you can use Double-Take, each source and target server must have a valid license key, which is
an alpha-numeric codes that applies the appropriate Double-Take license to your installation.

Server activation can also be completed through the Replication Console. See Licensing a
server on page 205.

1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.

2. Select Setup tasks.
3. Select Set License Key Menu.
4. Select Set License Key in /etc/DT/DT.conf.
5. Enter your license key and press Enter. The license key will automatically be inserted into the
configuration file. You are prompted to start the Double-Take service after the first installation,
and you must restart the service each time the license key is modified, such as after an upgrade.
6. Press Enter to return to the menu.
7. Press Q as many times as needed to return back to the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 53

Modifying security groups
During the installation, the user root is automatically added to the Double-Take administrators security
group. If you want to add other users or remove root, you will need to modify the security group
configuration for each source and target server. See Security on page 224 for more details on the
security groups and the privileges granted to each group.
1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.
2. Select Setup tasks.
3. Select Add/Remove users to Double-Take groups.
4. Select the necessary menu options to add or remove groups to the administrator or monitors
group as needed, and specify the user name when prompted.
5. When you have completed your security group modifications, press Q as many times as needed
to return back to the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 54

Configuring block device replication
In order to use Double-Take replication, data that will be replicated on a block device must be accessed
through a loop device, which is specially attached using the Double-Take loop driver (DTLOOP).
DTLOOP allows the loop device to serve as an access point for operations performed on the block
device so that data changes can be captured. Existing block devices may be available for replication, but
the data on those block devices can only be replicated if they are accessed through the DTLOOP loop
device. It is important that operations on the block device be made through the loop device only, or the
operations will not be replicated. Failure to do so will result in corrupted data on the target.
DTSetup allows you to configure entries in /etc/DT/dtloop_devices to attach block devices as
DTLOOPwhen Double-Take is started.

If your block device being protected with DTLOOP has a file system on it, do not mount them
from /etc/fstab. They should be mounted from an init script. DTMount must be started in the boot
sequence before the script to mount the loop devices is executed in order to ensure that the loop
devices have the replicated block devices associated with them. The script should then mount
the loop device, not on the native block device.

When making replication configuration changes, stop any applications that may be running and
restart them after the replication changes have been made. Double-Take needs to be loaded on
the file system before any applications, otherwise some data may not be replicated.
After the block device replication configuration is complete, applications must read and write
through the /dev/loop# device in order for replication to work.

1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.

2. Select Setup tasks.
3. Select Configure Block Device Replication.
4. Select Configure Block Device Replication setup file.
5. If you want to see a list of block devices to which DTLOOPcan be attached, select List block
devices on this system. Swap and LVMphysical partitions will not be included in the list.
6. Press Enter to continue.
7. To add a DTLOOPdevice, select Add an entry to /etc/DT/dtloop_devices.
8. Enter the path to the block device that is to be replicated and press Enter.
9. Enter the path to the loop device to use (/dev/loop#), if the same one should always be attached. If
you use more than one loop device, you should assign a specific number to the loop device so it
will persist beyond reboots. DTLOOP can also use the first one available, but that may mean it
attaches to a different one on subsequent reboots/restarts, which may not be desirable. Press
Enter to continue.
10. You will be asked if you want to attach at an offset into the block device and if you want to use an
encrypted loop device. In general, these options can be left blank. See the losetup man page for
more information on using encryption.
11. To remove any DTLOOP devices, select Remove /Detach entries in /etc/DT/dtloop_devices
and specify the path that you want to remove.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 55

12. To immediately attach all of the entries in /etc/DT/dtloop_devices, select Attach all entries in
/etc/DT/dtloop_devices to a loop device. If you do not select this option, you must stop and
restart the daemon for the changes to take effect.
13. To immediately detach all of the entries in /etc/DT/dtloop_devices, select Detach loop devices
from all entries in /etc/DT/dtloop_devices. This allows you to make changes to DTLOOP
without unloading the daemon.
14. When you have completed your block device replication configuration, press Q as many times as
needed to return back to the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

You can also attach and detach DTLOOP manually using the Setup Tasks, Configure Block
Device Replication, Manual Replication Configuration menu option. Changes made from
this menu are not persisted between reboots/restarts.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 56

Configuring server settings
Server settings are available in various places. You can access them via the Replication Console,
through DTCL See the Scripting Guide for details on accessing the server settings through DTCL. , or
through DTSetup. Initially, the server settings file, /etc/DT/DT.conf, on the source and target is blank. To
populate it with default values, start and stop the Double-Take daemon once.
1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.
2. Select Setup tasks.
3. Select Edit Double-Take config file.
4. The server settings are listed in alphabetical order. Make modifications as necessary, using the
control keys specified at the bottom of the page. For a complete list of each server setting, valid
values, default values, and optional notes, see Server Settings in the Scripting Guide.
5. Press control-X to exit the configuration file.
6. Enter Yes or No to save any changes.
7. Press Q as many times as needed to return back to the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 57

Configuring driver performance settings
Driver settings provide configuration flexibility so you can adjust Double-Take based on your servers,
network, and replication requirements. You may want to modify driver settings on both the source and
target.

Changing the driver performance settings can have a positive or negative impact on server
performance. These settings are for advanced users. If you are uncertain how to best modify the
driver performance settings, contact technical support.

1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.

2. Select Setup tasks.
3. Select Configure Double-Take driver performance.
4. The current driver settings are displayed.
5. Select a driver setting to modify the option.
l Toggle Adaptive ThrottlingYou can toggle between enabling (true) and disabling

(false) Adaptive Throttling. This occurs when kernel memory usage exceeds the
Throttling Start Level percentage. When throttling is enabled, operations are delayed by,
at most, the amount of time set in Maximum Throttling Delay, thus reducing kernel
memory usage. Throttling stops when the kernel memory usage drops below the
Throttling Stop Level percentage.
l Toggle Forced Adaptive ThrottlingYou can toggle between enabling (true) and

disabling (false) Forced Adaptive Throttling. This causes all operations to be delayed by,
at most, the amount of time in set in Maximum Throttling Delay, regardless of the kernel
memory being used. Adaptive Throttling must be enabled (true) in order for Forced
Adaptive Throttling to work.
l Set Maximum Throttling DelayThis option is the maximum time delay, in milliseconds,

used by the driver during a system delay.

l Set Throttling Delay IntervalThis option is the interval, in milliseconds, to check

memory usage during a throttling delay. If a delay is no longer needed, the remainder of the
delay is skipped.
l Set Throttling Start LevelThrottling starts when disk writes reach the specified

percentage. This prevents the driver from stopping replication because memory has been
exhausted.
l Set Throttling Stop LevelThrottling stops when disk writes reach the specified

percentage.
l Set Memory Usage LimitThis option is the amount of kernel memory, in bytes, used for

queuing replication operations. When this limit is exceeded, the driver will send an error to
the daemon forcing a remirror of all active connections.
l Set Maximum Write Buffer SizeThis option is the maximum amount of system

memory, in bytes, allowed for a single write operation. Operations exceeding this amount
are split into separate operations in the queue.
6. After you have completed your driver performance modifications, press Q as many times as
needed to return back to the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 58

Starting and stopping the daemon
The Double-Take daemon will start automatically after Double-Take is installed and the server is
rebooted. You can start and stop the Double-Take daemon using this built-in DTSetup script.
1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.
2. Select Start/Stop Double-Take daemon.
3. Select the necessary menu option to start or stop the daemon and handle the driver configuration.
l Start Double-Take and process driver configThis option starts the Double-Take

daemon and loads the Double-Take drivers.

l Stop Double-Take but preserve driver configThis option stops the Double-Take

daemon but does not unload the Double-Take drivers.

l Restart service but preserve driver configThis option does a full stop and start of the

Double-Take daemon but does not unload the Double-Take drivers.

l Restart service and reset driver configThis option does a full stop and start,

completely unloading the Double-Take daemon and Double-Take drivers and then
reloading them.
l Stop the running service and teardown driver configThis option stops the Double-

Take daemon and the Double-Take drivers are unloaded.

l Go to Replication Configuration menuThis option takes you to Setup Tasks,

Configure Block Device Replication. When you press Q to exit from that menu, you will
return this menu.
4. When you have completed your starting and stopping tasks, press Q as many times as needed to
return back to the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 59

Starting DTCL
You can launch the Double-Take interactive command prompt which allows you to enter DTCL
commands one at a time.
1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.
2. Select Start User Interface (DTCL-i).
3. Enter your DTCL commands one at a time at the Command prompt. For a complete list of DTCL
commands, their syntax, and instructions for completing tasks using DTCL, see the Scripting
Guide.
4. To exit the DTCL Command prompt, type exit.
5. When you have completed your DTCLtasks, press Q as many times as needed to return back to
the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 60

Viewing documentation and troubleshooting tools
1. Start DTSetup. See Running DTSetup on page 51.
2. Select Documentation/Troubleshooting tasks.
3. Select View log files to view the following log files. Double-Take logs alerts, which are
processing notifications, warnings, and error messages. The logs are written to disk.
l View /*.dtl in lessThis option uses the less file viewer program to view all of the Double-

Take logs, starting from the most recent.

l Follow the output of latestThis option uses tail -f to watch the output of the Double-

Take logs in real-time.

l View /var/log/messages in lessThis option uses the less file viewer program to view

the system log messages.

l Follow the output of /var/log/messagesThis option uses tail -f to watch the output of

the system log messages in real-time.

4. Select one of the Collect and package diagnostic info selections to run the DTInfo script
which collects configuration data. This can be useful when reporting problems to technical
support. Depending on the diagnostic option you select, the amount of data to be collected varies
between basic, detailed and full diagnostic information. You must have root (or uid 0 equivalent) to
execute the diagnostics or to copy or read the resulting file.
5. Select View user documentation to view several legal documents. DTSetup attempts to
determine your viewers, although you can specify your viewer.
l View End User License Agreement TXTThis option views the End User License

Agreement legal document.

l View driver module license TXTThis option views the open source legal document.

l Change a document viewerThis option allows you to specify a document viewer.

6. When you have completed your documentation and troubleshooting tasks, press Q as many times
as needed to return back to the main menu or to exit DTSetup.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 61

DTSetup menus
The following lists is an overview of the DTSetup menu system. Reference the links for complete details
on completing tasks in DTSetup.
1. Setup tasksLicense keys, security groups, replication configuration, server configuration, and
driver performance settings. See Setup tasks on page 52.
1. Set License Key MenuSee Activating your server on page 53.
2. Add/Remove users to Double-Take groupsSee Modifying security groups on page
54.
3. Configure Block Device ReplicationSee Configuring block device replication on page
55.
4. Edit Double-Take config fileSee Configuring server settings on page 57.
5. Configure Double-Take driver performanceSee Configuring driver performance
settings on page 58.
2. Start/Stop Double-Take daemonSee Starting and stopping the daemon on page 59.
3. Start User Interface (DTCL -i)See Starting DTCL on page 60.
4. Documentation/Troubleshooting tasksSee Viewing documentation and troubleshooting
tools on page 61.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 62

Data protection
Protecting your data consists of two main tasks - creating a replication set (to identify the data to protect)
and connecting that replication set to a target.
You have the following data protection options.
l Automated processIf you would like to use an automated process that walks you through
both the replication and connection tasks, you only need to complete the Connection Wizard
steps. See Establishing a data connection using the automated Connection Wizard on page 64.
l Manual processIf you want to go through the tasks manually, begin by creating a replication
set and then continue with establishing a connection. See Creating a replication set on page 66
and Establishing a connection manually using the Connection Manager on page 69.
l NATor firewallIf your environment has a NATor firewall configuration, you will need to begin
with creating a replication set and then follow the instructions for establishing a NATconnection.
See Creating a replication set on page 66 and Establishing a connection across a NAT or firewall
on page 73.
l Simulating a connectionIf you want to simulate a connection for planning purposes, begin by
creating a replication set and then continue with establishing a simulated connection. See
Creating a replication set on page 66 and Simulating a connection on page 75.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 63

Establishing a data connection using the automated
Connection Wizard
The Connection Wizard guides you through the process of protecting your data. It helps you select a
source, identify the data from your source that will be included in the replication set, and select a target.
1. Start the Connection Wizard to establish your connection by selecting Tools, Connection
Wizard.

If the Servers root is highlighted in the left pane of the Replication Console, the
Connection Wizard menu option will not be available. To access the menu, expand the
server tree in the left pane, and highlight a server in the tree.

2. The Connection Wizard opens to the Welcome screen. Review this screen and click Next to
continue.

At any time while using the Connection Wizard, click Back to return to previous screens
and review your selections.

3. If you highlighted a source in the Replication Console, the source will already be selected. If it is
not, select the Double-Take source. This is the server that you want to protect.

Double-Take will automatically attempt to log on to the selected source using previously
cached credentials. If the logon is not successful, the Logon dialog box will appear
prompting for your security identification.

4. Click Next to continue.

5. If you highlighted a target in the Replication Console, the target will already be selected. If it is not,
select the Double-Take target. This is your backup server that will protect the source.

Double-Take will automatically attempt to log on to the selected target using previously
cached credentials. If the logon is not successful, the Logon dialog box will appear
prompting for your security identification.

6. Click Next to continue.

7. Select Protect data and click Next to continue.
8. Choose to create a new replication set or use a replication set that already exists.
l Create a new replication set with this nameIf you choose to create a new replication,

specify a replication set name.

l Use this replication setIf you choose to use an existing replication set, specify the

name of that replication set by selecting it from the pull-down menu.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 64

 9. Click Next to continue.
10. If you are creating a new replication set, a tree display appears identifying the volumes and
directories available on your selected source server. Mark the check box of the volumes and/or
directories you want to protect and click Next to continue.
11. Select the location on the target where the data will be stored.
l Send all data to a single path on the targetThis option sends all selected volumes

and directories to the same location on the target. The default location is /source_
name/replication_set_name/volume_name.
l Send all data to the same path on the targetThis option sends all selected volumes

and directories to the same directories on the target.

l CustomTo select a custom path, click once in the Target Path field and modify the drive

and directory to the desired location.

12. Click Next to continue.
13. Review your selections on the summary screen. If your Connection Wizard settings are correct,
establish your connection by completing one of the two options below.
l If you do not want to set advanced options, click Finish. The Connection Wizard will close,

the connection will be established, and mirroring and replication will begin.
l If you want to set advanced options, click Advanced Options. The Connection Wizard will

close and the Double-Take Connection Manager will open. The Servers tab will be
completed.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 65

Creating a replication set
Before you can establish a connection, you must create a replication set.
1. Highlight a source in the left pane of the Replication Console and select Insert, Replication Set
from the menu bar. You can also right-click on the source name and select New, Replication
Set.
2. A replication set icon appears in the left pane under the source. By default, it is named New
Replication Set. Rename the newly inserted replication set with a unique name by typing over the
default name and pressing Enter. This process is similar to naming a new folder in Windows
Explorer.
3. Expand the tree under the replication set name to view the volume and directory tree for the
source.

The default number of files that are listed in the right pane of the Replication Console is
2500, but this is user configurable. A larger number of file listings allows you to see more
files in the Replication Console, but results in a slower display rate. A smaller number of
file listings displays faster, but may not show all files contained in the directory. To change
the number of files displayed, select File, Options and adjust the File Listings slider bar
to the desired number.

To hide offline files, such as those generated by snapshot applications, select File,
Options and disable Display Offline Files. Offline files and folders are denoted by the
arrow over the lower left corner of the folder or file icon.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 66

 4. Identify the data on the source that you want to protect by selecting volumes, drives, directories,
and/or specific files.

Be sure and verify what files can be included by reviewing the Replication capabilities on
page 146.

Replication sets should only include necessary data. Including data such as temporary
files, logs, and/or locks will add unnecessary overhead and network traffic. For example, if
you are using Samba, make sure that the location of the lock file (lock dir in samba.conf) is
not a location in your Double-Take Availability replication set.

5. After selecting the data for this replication set, right-click the new replication set icon and select
Save. A saved replication set icon will change from red to black.
6. If you need to select a block device for replication, right-click the replication set and select Add
Device.
7. The block devices configured for Double-Take Availability replication are shown by default.
Highlight the device to include in the replication set and click OK.

If the device you want to include is not displayed, you can click Show Other Devices to
view all devices which are eligible for Double-Take Availability replication. You can select

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 67

 any of these devices, but you cannot use them for Double-Take Availability replication
until they are configured for Double-Take Availability replication. The status no dtloop
indicates the device is not configured for Double-Take Availability replication.

Make sure your target has a partitioned device with sufficient space. It should be equal to
or greater than the storage of the source device.
The partition size displayed may not match the output of the Linux df command. This is
because df shows the size of the mounted file system not the underlying partition which
may be larger. Additionally, Double-Take Availability uses powers of 1024 when
computing GB, MB, and so on. The df command typically uses powers of 1000 and
rounds up to the nearest whole value.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for any additional devices.

9. Right-click the updated replication set icon and select Save.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 68

Establishing a connection manually using the Connection
Manager
After you have created a replication set, you can establish a connection through the Connection
Manager by connecting the replication set to a target.
1. Open the Connection Manager to establish the connection.
l Highlight the replication set and select Tools, Connection Manager.

l Right-click on the replication set and select Connection Manager.

l Drag and drop the replication set onto a target. The target icon could be in the left or right

pane of the Replication Console.

2. The Connection Manager opens to the Servers tab. Depending on how you opened the
Connection Manager, some entries on the Servers tab will be completed already. For example, if
you accessed the Connection Manager by right-clicking on a replication set, the name of the
replication set will be displayed in the Connection Manager. Verify or complete the fields on the
Servers tab.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 69

 l Source ServerSpecify the source server that contains the replication set that is going to
be transmitted to the Double-Take target.
l Replication SetAt least one replication set must exist on the source before establishing
a connection. Specify the replication set that will be connected to the target.
l Target ServerSpecify which Double-Take target will maintain the copy of the sources
replication set data. You can specify a machine name, IP address, or virtual IP address.
l RouteThis is an optional setting allowing you to specify the IP address and port on the
target the data will be transmitted through. This allows you to select a different route for
Double-Take traffic. For example, you can separate regular network traffic and Double-
Take traffic on a machine with multiple IP addresses.
l MappingsYou must specify the location on the target where the sources replication set
data will reside. Double-Take offers two predefined locations as well as a custom option
that allows you to create your own path.
l All To OneThis option replicates data from the source to a single volume on the

target. The pre-defined path is /source_name/replication_set_name/volume_name.

If you are replicating from multiple volumes on the source, each volume would be
replicated to the same volume on the target.
l One To OneThis option replicates data from the source to the same directory

structure on the target. For example, /var/data and /usr/files on the source will be
replicated to /var/data/ and /usr/files, respectively, on the target.
l Custom LocationIf the predefined options do not store the data in a location that

is appropriate for your network operations, you can specify your own custom location
where the replicated files will be sent. Click the target path and edit it, selecting the
appropriate location.
l Start Mirror on ConnectionMirroring can be initiated immediately when the
connection is established. If mirroring is not configured to start automatically, you must start
it manually after the connection is established.

Data integrity cannot be guaranteed without a mirror being performed. This option
is recommended for the initial connection.

l Start Replication on ConnectionReplication can be initiated immediately when the

connection is established. If replication is not configured to start automatically, you must
start it manually after the connection is established. If you disable this option, you will need
to perform a mirror prior to beginning replication to guarantee integrity.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 70

 3. If desired, you can configure mirror settings before establishing your connection. Select the
Mirroring tab on the Connection Manager.

l Full MirrorAll files in the replication set will be sent from the source to the target.
l Difference MirrorOnly those files that are different based size or date and time
(depending on files or block devices) will be sent from the source to the target.
l Only send data if the sources date is newer than the targets dateOnly

those files that are newer on the source are sent to the target.

If you are using a database application, do not use the newer option unless
you know for certain you need it. With database applications, it is critical that
all files, not just some of them that might be newer, get mirrored.

l Use checksum comparison to send minimal blocks of dataFor those files

flagged as different, the mirror performs a checksum comparison and only sends
those blocks that are different.

See Stopping, starting, pausing, or resuming mirroring on page 139 for a

comparison of how the file difference mirror settings work together, as well
as how they work with the global checksum setting on the Source tab of the

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 71

 Server Properties.

l Remirror on Auto-ReconnectIn certain circumstances, for example if the disk-based

queues on the source are exhausted, Double-Take will automatically disconnect
connections (called auto-disconnect) and then automatically reconnect them (called auto-
reconnect). In order to ensure data integrity on the target, Double-Take will perform an
automatic mirror (called an auto-remirror) after an auto-reconnect. If you enable this option,
specify the type of auto-remirror that will be performed.
l Differences with ChecksumAny file that is different on the source and target

based on date, time, and/or size is flagged as different. The mirror then performs a
checksum comparison on the flagged files and only sends those blocks that are
different.
l Differences with no ChecksumAny file that is different on the source and target

based on date, time, and/or size is sent to the target.

l FullAll files are sent to the target.

Database applications may update files without changing the date, time, or
file size. Therefore, if you are using database applications, you should use
the File Differences with checksum or Full option.

l Calculate Replication Set size on connectionDetermines the size of the replication

set prior to starting the mirror. The mirroring status will update the percentage complete if
the replication set size is calculated.
4. Click Connect to establish the connection.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 72

Establishing a connection across a NAT or firewall
If your source and target are on opposite sides of a NAT or firewall, you will need special configurations
to accommodate the complex network environment. Additionally, you must have the hardware already
in place and know how to configure the hardware ports. If you do not, see the reference manual for your
hardware.
NAT environments can be an IP-forwarding configuration with one to one port mappings. Port-
forwarding is not supported. Make sure you have added your servers to the Double-Take Console using
the correct IP address.
1. Double-Take uses specific ports for communication between the Double-Take servers and
Double-Take clients. In order to use Double-Take through a NAT or firewall, you must first verify
the current Double-Take port settings so that you can open the correct ports on your hardware to
allow Double-Take machines to communicate with each other. Using the following table, locate
and record your port settings for each of the Double-Take ports. The port setting can be found in
the following locations.
l Replication ConsoleFrom the Replication Console, select File, Options, and the

Configuration tab.
l Failover Control CenterFrom the Failover Control Center, select Settings,

Communications.
l Double-Take serverFrom the Replication Console, right-click on a server in the tree in

the left pane of the Replication Console, select Properties, and the Network tab.

Replication Console Status Transmit Port

The Status Transmit Port sends and receives directed UDP
communications to display status and statistics in the Replication Console.
The default setting is 1505.
Replication Console Heartbeat Advertisement
The Heartbeat Advertisement port sends and receives broadcast UDP
communications to populate the Replication Console tree with Double-
Take servers. The default setting is 1500.
Failover Control Center Service Transmit Port
The Service Transmit Port sends and receives TCP communication
between Double-Take servers and between Double-Take servers and
Double-Take clients. The default setting is 1500.
Failover Control Center Heartbeat Listen Port
The Heartbeat Listen Port send and receives broadcast UDP
communications to populate the Failover Control Center with Double-
Take servers. The default setting is 1500.
Double-Take Server Service Listen Port
The Service Listen Port sends and receives TCP communication between
Double-Take servers and between Double-Take servers and Double-

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 73

 Take clients. The default setting is 1500.
Double-Take Server Heartbeat Transmit Port
The Heartbeat Advertisement port sends and receives broadcast UDP
communications to populate the Replication Console tree with Double-
Take servers. The default setting is 1500.
Double-Take Server Status Listen Port
The Status Listen Port sends directed UDP communications to display
status and statistics in the Replication Console. The default setting is
1505.
Double-Take Server Statistics Logging Port
The port used for statistics logging is not available through a client. You
must use the get and set DTCL commands to modify that port. See the
Scripting Guide for details on the commands and the StatsPort option.
The default setting is 1506.

2. You need to configure your hardware so that Double-Take traffic is permitted access through the
router and directed appropriately. Using the port information from the previous section, configure
your router identifying each Double-Take server, its IP address, and the Double-Take and router
ports. Also, note the following caveats.
l Since Double-Take communication occurs bidirectionally, make sure you configure your
router for both incoming and outgoing traffic for all of your Double-Take servers and
Double-Take clients.
l In addition to UDP heartbeats, Double-Take failover can use ICMP pings to determine if

the source server is online. If you are going to use ICMP pings and a router between the
source and target is blocking ICMP traffic, failover monitors cannot be created or used. In
this situation, you must configure your router to allow ICMP pings between the source and
target.
Since there are many types of hardware on the market, each can be configured differently. See
your hardware reference manual for instructions on setting up your particular router.
3. If your network is configured to propagate UDP broadcasts, your servers will be populated in the
Replication Console from across the router. If not, you have to manually insert the servers, by
selecting Insert, Server. Type the IP address of the router the server is connected to and the port
number the server is using for heartbeats.
4. Once your server is inserted in the Replication Console, you can use the Connection Wizard or
the Connection Manager to establish your connection. See Establishing a data connection using
the automated Connection Wizard on page 64 or Establishing a connection manually using the
Connection Manager on page 69.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 74

Simulating a connection
Double-Take offers a simple way for you to simulate a connection in order to generate statistics that can
be used to approximate the time and amount of bandwidth that the connection will use when actively
established. This connection uses the TDU (Throughput Diagnostics Utility), which is a built-in null (non-
existent) target to simulate a real connection. No data is actually transmitted across the network. Since
there is no true connection, this connection type helps you plan for a disaster recovery solution.
1. Before and after simulating your connection, you should gather network and system information
specific to Double-Take operations. Use DTSetup to run DTInfo to automatically collect this data.
2. Select the DTSetup option for troubleshooting, then select the option for basic diagnostics.
3. When you run the diagnostics, it may take several minutes for it to finish processing. When it is
complete, a .tar.gz file will be created in /var/run/etc/DT/. The file name will have DTInfo with the
date and time. You must have root (or uid 0 equivalent) to execute the diagnostics or to copy or
read the resulting file.
4. Opening the Connection Manager to establish the connection.
l Highlight the replication set and select Tools, Connection Manager.

l Right-click on the replication set and select Connection Manager.

5. The Connection Manager opens to the Servers tab. Depending on how you opened the
Connection Manager, some entries on the Servers tab will be completed already. For example, if
you accessed the Connection Manager by right-clicking on a replication set, the name of the
replication set will be displayed in the Connection Manager. Verify or complete the fields on the
Servers tab.
l Source ServerSpecify the source server that contains the replication set that is going to

be simulated to the TDU.

l Replication SetAt least one replication set must exist on the source before establishing

a connection. Specify the replication set that will be connected to the TDU.
l Target ServerSelect the Diagnostics target.

l RouteAfter selecting the Diagnostics target, the Route will automatically be populated

with Throughput Diagnostics Utility (TDU).

l MappingsMappings are not required when simulating a connection because no data is

actually transmitted to the target.

l Start Mirror on ConnectionMake sure this option is selected so that your simulation

will be realistic.
l Start Replication on ConnectionMake sure this option is selected so that your

simulation will be realistic.

6. Click Connect to establish the connection. The simulation data will be logged to the Double-Take
statistics file.
7. Repeat steps 1-3 to run the diagnostics utility after the simulation is complete.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 75

Protection monitoring
Double-Take flexibility offers a wide variety of methods for monitoring your protection.
l Monitoring a data workload on page 77You can use the build-in monitoring in the Replication
Console to watch statistics and see at-a-glance the health of your protection.
l Log files on page 83The Double-Take log files provide notification, warning, and error
processing messages.
l Monitoring the Linux system log on page 94Double-Take generates Linux system messages.
l Statistics on page 108Additional statistics are available outside of the Replication Console.
l SNMP on page 118Both statistics and processing messages are available through SNMP.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 76

Monitoring a data workload
When a source is highlighted in the left pane of the Replication Console, the connections and their
statistics are displayed in the right pane. Additionally, colors and icons are used for the connections, and
the Double-Take servers, to help you monitor your connections.
l Connection statistics on page 77
l Connection and sever display on page 81

Connection statistics
1. You can change the statistics that are displayed by selecting File, Options and selecting the
Statistics tab.
2. The statistics displayed in the Replication Console will be listed with check boxes to the left of
each item. Mark the check box to the left of each statistic that you want to appear, and clear the
check box to the left of each statistic that you do not want to appear.
3. The statistics appear on the Replication Console in the order they appear on the Statistics tab. If
you want to reorder the statistics, highlight the statistic to be moved and select the up or down
arrow button, to the right of the vertical scroll bar, to move the selection up or down in the list.
Repeat this process for each statistic that needs to be moved until you reach the desired order.
4. If you have made changes to the statistics list and have not yet saved them, you can go back to the
previously used settings by clicking Reset to Last. This will revert the list back to the last saved
settings.
5. To return the statistics list to the Double-Take default selection and order, click Reset to Default.
6. Click OK to apply and save any changes that have been made to the order or display of the
Replication Console statistics.
Statistics marked with an asterisk (*) are not displayed, by default.

Replication Set
Replication set indicates the name of the connected replication set.
Connection ID
The connection ID is the incremental counter used to number each connection
established. This number is reset to one each time the Double-Take service is
restarted.
Target Name
The name of the target as it appears in the server tree in the left pane of the Replication
Console. If the servers name is not in the server tree, the IP address will be displayed.
Target IP
The target IP is the IP address on the target machine where the mirroring and
replication data is being transmitted.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 77

Target Data State
l OKThe data on the target is in a good state.
l MirroringThe target is in the middle of a mirror process. The data will not be in a
good state until the mirror is complete.
l Mirror RequiredThe data on the target is not in a good state because a remirror
is required. This may be caused by an incomplete or stopped mirror or an operation
may have been dropped on the target.
l Restore requiredThe data on the source and target do not match because of a
failover condition. Restore the data from the target back to the source. If you want to
discard the changes on the target, you can remirror to resynchronize the source and
target.
l Not ReadyThe Linux drivers have not yet completed loading on the target.
Target Status
l OKThe target machine is active and online.
l Not LoadedThe target module is not loaded on the target. (For example, the
license key is invalid.)
l PausedThe target machine is paused by user intervention.
l RetryingThe target machine is retrying operations for the connection.
This field may not be updated until there is source/target activity.
Commit Mode *
The commit mode status indicates the connection status.
l Real-timeData is being transmitted to the target machine in real-time.
l ScheduledData is waiting to be transmitted to the target machine until one or
more transmit options have been met.
Transmit Mode
l StartedData is being transferred to the target machine.
l PausedIf the transmission is real-time and the transmission has been paused, the
Transmit Mode indicates Paused.
l ScheduledIf the transmission is scheduled, the Transmit Mode indicates
Scheduled.
l StoppedData is not being transferred to the target machine.
l ErrorThere is a transmission error.
Mirror Status
l MirroringIf the file size of the replication set has not been calculated and the data
is being mirrored to the target machine, the Mirror Status will indicate Mirroring.
l IdleData is not being mirrored to the target machine.
l PausedMirroring has been paused.
l Percentage CompleteIf the file size of the replication set has been calculated
and the data is being mirrored to the target machine, the Mirror Status will display
the percentage of the replication set that has been sent.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 78

 l WaitingMirroring is complete, but data is still being written to the target.
l RestoringData is being restored from the target to the source.
l VerifyingData is being verified.
l Removing OrphansDouble-Take is checking for orphan files within the target
path location (files that exist on the target but not on the source). These files will be
removed.
Replication Status
l ReplicatingData is being replicated to the target machine.
l ReadyThere is no data to replicate to the target machine.
l StoppedReplication has stopped.
l PendingIf auto-remirror is enabled and you have experienced a source or target
failure and recovery, the status will change to pending while the connections are
reestablished and will update when the remirror begins. If auto-remirror is disabled
and you have experienced a source or target failure and recovery, replication will be
Pending until a remirror is performed. Without a remirror, data integrity cannot be
guaranteed.
l Out of MemoryKernel memory has been exhausted.
Queued (Ops) *
The queued (ops) statistic indicates the total number of mirror and replication
operations that are in the source queue.
Sent (Bytes)
The sent (bytes) statistic indicates the total number of mirror and replication bytes that
have been transmitted to the target.
Sent Compressed (Bytes)
The sent compressed (bytes) statistic indicates the total number of compressed mirror
and replication bytes that have been transmitted to the target. If compression is
disabled, this statistic will be the same as sent (bytes).
Intermediate Queue (Bytes) *
The intermediate queue (bytes) indicates the total amount of memory being used by
the operations buffer queue.
Disk Queue (Bytes)
The disk queue (bytes) indicates the amount of disk being used to queue data on the
source.
Queued Replication (Bytes)
The queued replication (bytes) statistic is the total number of replication bytes that are
remaining to be transmitted from the source.
Sent Replication (Bytes)
The sent replication (bytes) statistic is the total number of replication bytes that have
been transmitted to the target.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 79

Sent Compressed Replication (Bytes) *
The sent compressed replication (bytes) statistic is the total number of compressed
replication bytes that have been transmitted to the target. If compression is disabled,
this statistic will be the same as sent replication (bytes).
Queued Mirror (Ops) *
The queue mirror (ops) statistic is the total number of mirror operations in the queue.
Sent Mirror (Bytes)
The sent mirror (bytes) statistic is the total number of mirror bytes that have been
transmitted to the target.
Sent Compressed Mirror (Bytes) *
The sent compressed mirror (bytes) statistic is the total number of compressed mirror
bytes that have been transmitted to the target. If compression is disabled, this statistic
will be the same as sent mirror (bytes).
Skipped Mirror (Bytes)
The skipped mirror (bytes) statistic is the total number of bytes that have been skipped
when performing a difference or checksum mirror. These bytes are skipped because
the data is not different on the source and target machines.
Remaining Mirror (Bytes)
The remaining mirror (bytes) statistic is the total number of mirror bytes that are
remaining to be sent to the target.
Queued Replication (Ops) *
The queued replication (ops) statistic is the total number of replication operations in the
queue.
Last File Touched
The last file touched identifies the last file that Double-Take transmitted to the target. If
you are using long file names (more than several thousand characters long) you may
want to disable the display of this statistic to improve Replication Console response
times.
Connected Since
Connected since is the date and time indicating when the current connection was
made. This field is blank, indicating that a TCP/IP socket is not present, when the
connection is waiting on transmit options or if the transmission has been stopped. This
field will maintain the date and time, indicating that a TCP/IP socket is present, when
transmission has been paused.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 80

Connection and sever display
You can configure when the icons and colors change to accommodate your network environment. For
example, a slow or busy network may need longer delays before updating the icons or colors.
1. Select File, Options. On the Configuration tab, you will see Site Monitor and Connection
Monitor. The Site Monitor fields control the icons on the left pane of the Replication Console
and the icons on the right pane when a group is highlighted in the left pane. The Connection
Monitor field controls the display when a server is highlighted in the left pane. These two
separate monitoring capabilities allow for flexible monitoring.
2. Under Site Monitor, specify Check Status Interval to identify the number of seconds between
requests sent from the Replication Console to the servers in order to update the display. Valid
values are between 0 and 3600. The default setting is 30 seconds.
3. Under Site Monitor, specify Missed Status Responses to identify the number of responses
from a server that can be missed before the Replication Console considers communications lost
and updates the icons. Valid values are between 1 and 100. The default setting is 2.
4. Under Connection Monitor, specify Missed Status Responses to identify the number of
responses from a server that can be missed before the Replication Console considers
communications lost and updates the icons and colors. Valid values are between 0 and 1000. The
default setting is 5.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

If the Site Monitor and Connection Monitor settings are different, at times, the icons
and color may not be synchronized between the left and right panes.

The following icons are displayed in the left pane.

An icon with yellow and blue servers indicates a server that is working properly.

A red X on a server icon indicates the Replication Console cannot communicate with that
server or that is a problem with one of the servers connections. If the connection background is
gray, it is a communication issue. If the connection also has a red X, it is a connection issue.
A red tree view (folder structure) on a server icon indicates a restore is required because of a
failover.

A black X on a server icon indicates the server is not running Double-Take.

The following icons and colors are displayed in the right pane when a server is highlighted in the
left pane.

A green checkmark on a connection indicates the connection is working properly.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 81

 A red X on a connection indicates a connection error. For example, an error may be caused
by broken transmission or pending replication. To determine the exact problem, locate the
connection data item that appears in red.
White backgroundIf the connection background is white, the Replication Console and the
source are communicating.
Gray backgroundIf the connection background is gray, the Replication Console and the
source are no longer communicating. The connection data stops updating once communications
have stopped. Once communications have been reestablished, the connection background will
change back to white.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 82

Log files
Various Double-Take components (Double-Take service, Replication Console, Failover Control Center,
and the Command Line Client) generate a log file to gather alerts, which are notification, warning, and
error messages. The log files are written to disk.
Each log file consists of a base name, a series number, and an extension.
l Base NameThe base name is determined by the application or process that is running.
l Double-Takedtlog

l Replication Consolemc

l Failover Control Centerfcc

l Command Line Clientdtcl

l Series NumberThe series number ranges from 1 to 999. For example, Double-Take begins
logging messages to dtlog1. When this file reaches its maximum size, the next log file will be
written to dtlog2. As long as log messages continue to be written, files dtlog3, dtlog4, dtlog5 will be
opened and filled. When the maximum number of files is reached, which by default is 5, the oldest
file is deleted when the sixth file is created. For example, when dtlog6 is created, dtlog1 is deleted
and when dtlog7 is created, dtlog2 is deleted. When file dtlog999 is created and filled, dtlog1 will
be re-created and Double-Take will continue writing log messages to that file. In the event that a
file cannot be removed, its number will be kept in the list, and on each successive file remove, the
log writer will attempt to remove the oldest file in the list.
l ExtensionThe extension for each log file is .dtl.
l Double-Takedtlog1.dtl, dtlog2.dtl

l Replication Consolemc1.dtl, mc2.dtl

l Failover Control Centerfcc1.dtl, fcc2.dtl

l Command Line Clientdtcl1.dtl, dtcl2.dtl

The following topics are available for the log file.

l Viewing the log files through a text editor on page 84
l Viewing the Double-Take log file through the Replication Console on page 85
l Configuring the properties of the Double-Take log file on page 87
l Double-Take log messages on page 88

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 83

Viewing the log files through a text editor
The log files can be viewed, from the location where Double-Take is installed, with a standard text editor.
The following list describes the information found in each column of the log file.
1. Date the message was generated
2. Time the message was generated
3. Process ID
4. Thread ID
5. Sequence number is an incremental counter that assigns a unique number to each message
6. The type or level of message displayed - 1 for warning or error message and 2 for informational
message
7. Message ID
8. Message text
Sample Double-Take log file

01/15/2010 14:14:18.3900 95 98 2 2 69 Kernel Started

01/15/2010 14:14:18.4200 95 98 3 2 10004 Valid Activation Key Detected :
01/15/2010 14:14:18.5350 98 170 4 2 52501 Target module loaded successfully
01/15/2010 14:14:18.6760 98 172 5 2 10004 Valid Activation Key Detected :
01/15/2010 14:14:18.9870 130 131 6 2 51501 Source module loaded successfully
01/15/2010 14:24:15.2070 130 132 7 2 72 Connection Request from ip://206.31.4.305
01/15/2010 14:24:16.3090 131 133 8 2 600002 Unified login provides ADMIN access
01/15/2010 14:24:40.9680 132 134 9 2 99 RepSet Modified: UserData
01/15/2010 14:25:22.4070 134 131 10 2 71 Originator Attempting ip://206.31.4.305 01/15/2010 14:25:22.5030
134 131 11 2 0 Transmission Create to ip://206.31.4.305.
01/15/2010 14:25:22.6060 135 133 12 2 500000 UserData is connected to ip://206.31.4.305 01/15/2010
14:25:23.5030 136 98 13 2 87 Start Replication on connection 1

Sample Replication Console log file

00/00/0000 00:00:00.0000 Application starting

09/11/2010 12:45:53.8980 704 1032 1 2 0 Could not find XML file: C:\Program Files\Vision
Solutions\Double-Take for Linux\Administrator.xml, default groups will be added.
09/11/2010 12:45:53.9580 704 1032 2 2 0 Adding default group: Double-Take Servers
09/11/2010 12:45:53.9580 704 1032 3 2 0 Adding default group: Double-Take Servers\
Auto-Discovered Servers
09/11/2010 12:46:08.3390 704 1032 4 210004 Evaluation license expires in 95 day(s).

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 84

Viewing the Double-Take log file through the Replication Console
In addition to the statistics and status shown in the Replication Console, you can also open a message
window to view the Double-Take log file.
1. Open a new message window using any of the following methods.
l Right-click on the server that you want to monitor in the left pane and select New, Message

Window.
l Select the Message Window icon from the toolbar.

l Select Monitor, New Message Window and identify the Server that you want to monitor.

2. Repeat step 1 if you want to open multiple message windows.

The standard appearance of the message window is a white background. If your

message window has a gray background, the window is inactive. The Replication
Console may have lost communications with that server, for example, or you may no
longer be logged into that server.

The message window is limited to the most recent 1000 lines. If any data is missing an
entry in red will indicate the missing data. Regardless of the state of the message window,
all data is maintained in the Double-Take log on the server.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 85

 3. To control the window after it is created, use one of the following methods to access the control
methods listed in the following table.
l Right-click on the message window and select the appropriate control.

l Select the appropriate toolbar control.

l Select Monitor, the name of the message window, and the appropriate control.

Close
Closes the message window

Clear
Clears the message window

Pause/Resume
Pauses and resumes the message window.
Pausing prevents new messages from being displayed in the message
window so that you are not returned to the bottom of the message window
every time a new message arrives. The messages that occur while the
window is logged are still logged to the Double-Take log file.
Resuming displays the messages that were held while the window was
paused and continues to display any new messages.
Pausing is automatically initiated if you scroll up in the message window.
The display of new log messages will automatically resume when you
scroll back to the bottom.

Copy
Allows you to copy selected text
Options
This control is only available from the Monitor menu. Currently, there are
no filter options available so this option only allows you to select a different
server. In the future, this control will allow you to filter which messages to
display.

4. To change which server you are viewing messages for, select a different machine from the drop
down list on the toolbar. If necessary, the login process will be initiated.
5. To move the message window to other locations on your desktop, click and drag it to another area
or double-click it to automatically undock it from the Replication Console.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 86

Configuring the properties of the Double-Take log file
1. To modify the maximum file size and the number of Double-Take log files that are maintained,
access the Server Properties dialog box by right-clicking a machine name in the left pane of the
Replication Console and selecting Properties.
2. Select the Logging tab.
3. At the top of the window, Folder indicates the directory where the log files are located. The
default is the directory where the Double-Take program files are installed.
4. Modify any of the options under Messages and Alerts, if necessary.
l Maximum LengthSpecify the maximum length of the log file. The default size is

1048576 bytes and is limited by the available hard drive space.

l Maximum FilesSpecify the maximum number of log files that are maintained. The

default is 5 and the maximum is 999.

If you change the Maximum Length or Maximum Files, you must restart the
Double-Take daemon for the change to take effect.

5. Click OK to save the changes.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 87

Double-Take log messages
The following list describes some of the standard Double-Take alerts that may be displayed in the log
files. The IDappears in column 7 of the log file, and the message appears in column 8.

In this information, con_id refers to the unique connection ID assigned to each connection
between a source replication set and a target.

There are several log messages with the ID of 0. See the description in the Message column in
the log file.

7 Synchronous ioctl returned STATUS_PENDING

7 Failed to reset Replication Flags. Replication may not be performed correctly.
l Communication with the Double-Take driver is not being performed correctly. A
reboot is required to guarantee replication and data integrity.
l An error occurred between the Double-Take driver and recent changes to the
replication set. The possible resolutions are to undo the changes to the replication
set, stop and restart Double-Take, or reboot the server.
69 Double-Take kernel started on server_name
The Double-Take service was started on the Double-Take server specified.
70 Double-Take kernel stopped
The Double-Take service was stopped on a Double-Take server.
71 Originator attempting ip://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
A source is requesting to connect a replication set to a target machine.
72 Connection request from ip://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
A target machine has received a source machines request to connect a replication set
to the target.
73 Connected to ip://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
A source machine has successfully connected a replication set to a target machine.
74 Connection paused with ip://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
A network connection between the source and the target exists and is available for data
transmission, but data is being held in queue and is not being transmitted to the target.
This happens because the target machine cannot write data to disk fast enough.
Double-Take will resolve this issue on its own by transmitting the data in queue when
the target catches up.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 88

75 Connection resumed with ip://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
The transmission of data from the source machine to the target machine has resumed.
76 Connection failed to ip://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
An attempt to establish a network connection between a source machine and target
machine has failed. Check your network connections and verify that the target machine
is still online.
77 Connection lost with IP address address
The network connection previously established between a source machine and target
machine has been lost. Check your network connections and troubleshoot to see why
the connection was lost.
78 Auto-disconnect threshold has been reached.
The Double-Take queue has exceeded its limit, and the auto-disconnect process will
disconnect the source and target connection. The auto-reconnect process will
automatically reestablish the connection if the auto-reconnect feature is enabled. If the
auto-reconnect feature is not enabled, you must first verify that the connection between
the source and target has been broken, and then manually reestablish the connection
in the Replication Console.
79 Memory freed to bring Double-Take memory usage below the limit
Data in the source queue has been sent to the target machine, bringing the pagefile
below its limit.
80 Trying to auto-retransmit to ip://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Double-Take is attempting to automatically reconnect previously established source
and target connections after a server reboot or auto-disconnect. This is also referred to
as the auto-reconnect process.
81 Schedule transmit start to target
A scheduled transmission of data from a source machine to a target machine has
started. See the description in the Message column in the log file.
82 Schedule transmit end to target
A scheduled transmission of data from a source machine to a target machine has
ended. See the description in the Message column in the log file.
85 repset has been auto-disconnected
Double-Take automatically disconnects the source and target connection because the
queue size has reached a specified size for this action.
87 Start replication on connection con_id
Data has started replicating from a source machine to a target machine.
88 Stop replication on connection con_id
Data has stopped replicating from a source machine to a target machine.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 89

89 Mirror started con_id
Data is being mirrored from a source machine to a target machine.
90 Mirror stopped con_id
The process of mirroring data from a source machine to a target machine has stopped
due to user intervention or an auto-disconnect. (This means the mirroring process was
not completed.)
91 Mirror paused con_id
The process of mirroring data from a source machine to a target machine has paused
because the target machine cannot write the data to disk fast enough. Double-Take will
resolve this issue on its own by transmitting the data in queue when the target catches
up.
92 Mirror resumed con_id
The process of mirroring data from a source machine to a target machine has resumed.
93 Mirror ended con_id
The process of mirroring data from a source machine to a target machine has ended.
94 Verification started con_id
The verification process of confirming that the Double-Take data on the target is
identical to the data on the source has started.
95 Verification ended con_id
The verification process of confirming that the Double-Take data on the target is
identical to the data on the source has ended.
97 Restore started con_id
The restoration process of copying the up-to-date data from the target back to the
original source machine has started.
98 Restore completed con_id
The restoration process of copying the up-to-date data from the target back to the
original source machine has been completed.
99 RepSet Modified: repset_ name
This message means that the specified replication set has been modified.
100 Failover condition has been met and user intervention is required
Double-Take has determined that the source has failed, and requires manual
intervention to start the failover process.
101 Failover in progress!!!
The conditions for failover to occur have been met, and the failover process has
started.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 90

102 Target full!
The disk to which data is being written on the target is full. This issue may be resolved
by deleting files on the target machine or by adding another disk.
801 Auto-disconnect has occurred on IP address with connection con_id Disconnected
replication set name: repset_name.
Auto-disconnect has occurred for the specified connection. This is due to the source
queue filling up because of a network or target failure or bottleneck.
10001 Activation key is not valid.
An invalid license key was identified when the Double-Take service was started.
10002 Evaluation period has expired.
The evaluation license has expired.
10003 Activation code violation with machine machine_name
Duplicate single-server license keys are being used on the servers, and Double-Take is
disabled.
10004 Valid activation key detected
A valid license key was identified when the Double-Take service was started.
51001 Source module failed to load
The Double-Take source module failed to load. Look at previous log messages to
determine the reason. (Look for messages that indicate that either the license key was
invalid or the user-configurable source module was not set to load automatically at
startup.) The source module may have been configured this way intentionally.
51501 Source module loaded successfully
The Double-Take source module was loaded successfully.
51502 Source module already loaded
The Double-Take source module was already loaded.
51503 Source module stopped
The Double-Take source module stopped.
52000 The target has been paused due to manual intervention.
52000 The target has been resumed due to manual intervention
The target has been paused or resumed through user intervention.
52000 Unfinished Op error
This error message contains various Microsoft API codes. The text Code -<x> Internal
<y> appears at the end of this message. The code value indicates why the operation

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 91

 failed, and the internal value indicates the type of operation that failed. These are the
most common code values that appear in this error message.
l (5) Permission denied: The account running the Double-Take service does not have
permission to update the file specified.
l (32) Sharing violation: Another application is using a particular file that Double-Take
is trying to update. Double-Take will wait and try to update the file later.
l (112) Disk full: The disk to which data is being written on the target is full. This issue
may be resolved by deleting files on the target machine or by adding another disk.
52501 Target module loaded successfully
The Double-Take target module was loaded successfully.
52502 Target module already loaded
The Double-Take target module was already loaded.
52503 Target module stopped
The Double-Take target module stopped.
53001 File was missing from target
The verification process confirms that the files on the target are identical to the files on
the source. This message would only appear if the verification process showed that a
file on the source was missing from the target.
53003 Could not read filename
Double-Take could not read a file on the source machine because the file may have
been renamed or deleted. For example, temporary files show up in queue but do not
show up during transmission. (No user action required.)
54000 Kernel started
The Double-Take service was started.
54001 Failover module failed to load
The Double-Take failover module failed to load. Look at previous log messages to
determine the reason.
54503 Failover module stopped
The Double-Take failover module stopped.
99001 Starting source module low memory processing
The sources queue is full, and the auto-disconnect process will disconnect the source
and target connection. The auto-reconnect process will automatically reestablish the
connection if the auto-reconnect feature is enabled. If the auto-reconnect feature is not
enabled, you must first verify that the connection between the source and target has
been broken, and then manually reestablish the connection in the Replication Console.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 92

99999 Application is terminating normally
The Double-Take service is shutting down normally.
503010 Asyncloctl for status thread 178 terminated, terminating the status thread
A Double-Take process monitors the state of the Double-Take driver. When the
Double-Take service is shut down, the driver is shut down, and this process is
terminated. (No user action required.)
600002 Unified login provides ADMIN access
600002 User has level access (x)
l Using the current login grants ADMIN access.
l The listed user has listed access level and access level ID.
700000 The source machine source_machine is not responding to a ping.
This occurs when all monitored IP addresses on the source machine stop responding
to pings. Countdown to failover will begin at the first occurrence and will continue until
the source machine responds or until failover occurs.
800000 Active Directory GetHostSpns function call failed
800000 Active Directory RemoveSpns function call failed
800000 Active Directory AddSpns function call failed
l Double-Take failed to get the host SPN (Service Principal Name) from Active
Directory.
l Double-Take failed to remove an SPN from Active Directory.
l Double-Take failed to add a host SPN to Active Directory.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 93

Monitoring the Linux system log
An event is a significant occurrence in the system or in an application that requires administrators to be
notified. The operating system writes notifications for these events to the Linux system log. The location
of the log file depends on the configuration of /etc/syslog.conf, however, by default, it is
/var/log/messages. The following table identifies the events generated by Double-Take.

1 This evaluation period has expired. Mirroring and replication have been stopped. To obtain
a license, please contact your vendor.
ErrorContact your vendor to purchase either a single or site license.
2 The evaluation period expires in %1 day(s).
InformationContact your vendor before the evaluation period expires to purchase
either a single or site license.
3 The evaluation period has been activated and expires in %1 day(s).
InformationContact your vendor before the evaluation period expires to purchase
either a single or site license.
4 Duplicate license keys detected on machine %1 from machine %2.
WarningIf you have an evaluation license or a site license, no action is necessary. If
you have a single license, you must purchase either another single license or a site
license.
5 This product edition can only be run on Windows Server or Advanced Server running the
Server Appliance Kit.
ErrorVerify your license key has been entered correctly and contact technical
support.
3000 Logger service was successfully started.
InformationNo action required.
3001 Logger service was successfully stopped.
InformationNo action required.
4000 Kernel was successfully started.
InformationNo action required.
4001 Target service was successfully started.
InformationNo action required.
4002 Source service was successfully started.
InformationNo action required.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 94

4003 Source service was successfully stopped.
InformationNo action required.
4004 Target service was successfully stopped.
InformationNo action required.
4005 Kernel was successfully stopped.
InformationNo action required.
4006 Service has aborted due to the following unrecoverable error: %1
ErrorRestart the Double-Take service.
4007 Auto-disconnecting from %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4 due to %5
WarningThe connection is auto-disconnecting because the disk-based queue on the
source has been filled, the service has encountered an unknown file ID, the target
server has restarted, or an error has occurred during disk queuing on the source or
target (for example, Double-Take cannot read from or write to the transaction log file).
4008 Auto-disconnect has succeeded for %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4009 Auto-reconnecting Replication Set %1 to %2 (%3)
InformationNo action required.
4010 Auto-reconnect has succeeded connecting Replication Set %1 to %2 (%3)
InformationNo action required.
4011 Auto-reconnect has failed connecting Replication Set %1 to %2 (%3)
ErrorManually reestablish the replication set to target connection.
4014 Service has started network transmission.
InformationNo action required.
4015 Service has stopped network transmission.
InformationNo action required.
4016 Service has established a connection to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4017 Service has disconnected from %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4018 %1, however, mirroring and replication have been disabled as a restore is required due
to a previous failover.
WarningPerform a restoration.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 95

4019 Service has started a mirror to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4020 Service has paused a mirror to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4021 Service has resumed a mirror to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4022 Service has stopped a mirror to %1 for Replication Set %2, ID: %3, %4
InformationNo action required.
4023 Service has completed a mirror to %1 %2 for Replication Set %3, ID: %4, %5
InformationNo action required.
4024 Service has started Replication to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4025 Service has stopped Replication to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4026 The target has been paused due to user intervention.
InformationNo action required.
4027 The target has been resumed due to user intervention.
InformationNo action required.
4028 Registration of service class with Active Directory failed. Verify that the Active
Directory server is up and the service has the proper permissions to update its entries.
WarningVerify that the Active Directory server is running and that the Double-Take
service has permission to update Active Directory.
4029 Registration of service instance with Active Directory failed. Verify that the Active
Directory server is up and the service has the proper permissions to update its entries.
WarningVerify that the Active Directory server is running and that the Double-Take
service has permission to update Active Directory.
4030 RSResource.dll has an unknown error. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4031 RSResource.dll could not be opened. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 96

4032 The RSResource.dll component version does not match the component version
expected by the product. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4033 RSResource.dll build version is invalid. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4034 Error verifying the service name. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4035 Error verifying the product name. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4036 Error verifying the vendor name. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4037 Error verifying the vendor URL name. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4038 Error verifying the product code. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4039 Error while reading RSResource.dll. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4040 The product code is illegal for this computer hardware. The product functionality has
been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4041 The product code is illegal for this operating system version. The product functionality
has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 97

4042 The product code requires installing the Windows Server Appliance Kit. The product
functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4043 This product can only be run on a limited number of processors and this server
exceeds the limit. The product functionality has been disabled.
ErrorReinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy
of the RSResource.dll. Contact technical support if this error persists.
4044 An error was encountered and replication has been stopped. It is necessary to stop and
restart the service to correct this error.
ErrorContact technical support if this error persists.
4045 %1 value must be between 1025 and 65535. Using default of %2.
ErrorVerify that the Double-Take port value you are trying to use is within the valid
range. If it is not, it will automatically be reset to the default value.
4046 This service failed to start because of a possible port conflict. Win32 error: %1
ErrorVerify that the Double-Take ports are not conflicting with ports used by other
applications.
4047 Could not load ZLIB DLL %1. Some levels of compression will not be available.
ErrorThe compression levels available depend on your operating system. You can
reinstall the software, using the installation Repair option, to install a new copy of the
DynaZip.dll, or contact technical support if this error persists.
4048 Service has started a delete orphans task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4049 Service has paused a delete orphans task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4050 Service has resumed a delete orphans task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4051 Service has stopped a delete orphans task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4052 Service has completed a delete orphans task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4053 Service has started a restore task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 98

4054 Service has paused a restore task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4055 Service has resumed a restore task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4056 Service has stopped a restore task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4057 Service has completed a restore task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4058 Service has started a verification task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4059 Service has paused a verification task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4060 Service has resumed a verification task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4061 Service has stopped a verification task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4062 Service has completed a verification task to %1 (%2) for Replication Set %3, ID: %4
InformationNo action required.
4063 Bandwidth limit to %1 (%2) has changed to %3.
InformationNo action required.
4100 Product license key is invalid. Please check that it is typed correctly and is valid for the
version of the operating system in use.
ErrorIf you are in the process of installing Double-Take, verify that you are using a 24
character alpha-numeric key. If Double-Take is already installed, confirm that the key
entered is correct. If the key appears to be correct, contact technical support.
4101 This service will not run on this device. Contact your sales representative for upgrade
procedures.
ErrorThe license key does not match the type of server you are attempting to run on.
Contact your vendor for a new license key or contact technical support.
4102 Product license key is valid.
InformationNo action required.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 99

4110 Target cannot write %1 due to target disk being full. Operation will be retried (%2 times
or forever)
WarningThe disk on the target is full. The operation will be retried according to the
TGExecutionRetryLimit setting.
4111 Target can not write %1 due to a sharing violation. Operation will be retried (%2 times or
forever)
WarningA sharing violation error is prohibiting Double-Take from writing on the
target. The operation will be retried according to the TGExecutionRetryLimit setting.
4112 Target can not write %1 due to access denied. Operation will be retried (%2 times or
forever)
WarningAn access denied error is prohibiting Double-Take from writing on the
target. The operation will be retried according to the TGExecutionRetryLimit setting.
4113 Target can not write %1 due to an unknown reason. Operation will be retried (%2 times
or forever). Please check the log files for further information on the error.
WarningAn unknown error is prohibiting Double-Take from writing on the target. The
operation will be retried according to the TGExecutionRetryLimit setting.
4120 Target write to %1 was completed successfully after %2 retries.
InformationNo action required.
4150 Target write %1 failed after %2 retries and will be discarded. See the event log or log
files for error conditions. After correcting the problem, you should re-mirror or run a verify
to resynchronize the changes.
ErrorThe operation has been retried according to the TGExecutionRetryLimit setting
but was not able to be written to the target and the operation was discarded. Correct
the problem and remirror the files.
4200 In band task %1 submitted from %2 by %3 at %4
InformationNo action required.
4201 In band task %1 discarded (submitted from %2 by %3 at %4)
WarningA task may be discarded in the following scenarios: all connections to a
target are manually disconnected, replication is stopped for all connections to a target,
or an auto-disconnect occurs. If one of these scenarios did not cause the task to be
discarded, contact technical support.
4202 Running %1 in band script: %2 (task %3 submitted from %4 by %5 at %6)
InformationNo action required.
4203 Completed run of in band script: %1 (exit code %2)
InformationNo action required.
4204 Error running in band script: %1
ErrorReview the task and its associated script(s) for syntax errors.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 100

4205 Timeout (%1 seconds) running in band script: %2
WarningThe timeout specified for the script to complete has expired. Normal
processing will continue. You may need to manually terminate the script if it will never
complete.
4206 Run timeout disabled for in band script: %1
WarningThe timeout period was set to zero (0). Double-Take will not wait for the
script to complete before continuing. No action is required.
4207 In band scripts disabled by server - no attempt will be made to run %1
WarningEnable task command processing.
4300 A connection request was received on the target before the persistent target paths
could be loaded.
ErrorYou may need to disconnect and reconnect your replication set.
4301 Unable to block target paths, the driver is unavailable.
ErrorIf you need to block your target paths, contact technical support.
4302 Target Path %1 has been successfully blocked
InformationNo action required.
4303 Blocking of target path: %1 failed. Error Code: %2
WarningIf you need to block your target paths, contact technical support.
4304 Target Path %1 has been successfully unblocked
InformationNo action required.
4305 Unblocking of target path: %1 failed. Error Code: %2
WarningIf you need to unblock your target paths, contact technical support.
4306 Target paths for source %1 (%2) Connection id: %3 are already blocked
WarningNo action required.
4307 Target paths for source %1 (%2) Connection id: %3 are already unblocked
WarningNo action required.
4308 Error loading target paths for blocking, registry key %1 has been corrupted.
ErrorIf you need to block your target paths, contact technical support.
5000 Server Monitor service was successfully started.
InformationNo action required.
5001 Server Monitor service was successfully stopped.
InformationNo action required.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 101

5002 Placeholders were modified to %1.
InformationNo action required.
5100 Failover completed for %1.
InformationNo action required.
5101 IP address %1 with subnet mask %2 was added to target machine's %3 adapter.
InformationNo action required.
5102 %1 has reached a failover condition. A response from the user is required before
failover can take place.
WarningUser intervention has been configured. Open the Failover Control Center
and accept or decline the failover prompt.
5103 Started adding drive shares from %1 to %2.
InformationNo action required.
5104 %1 drive shares were taken over by %2.
InformationNo action required.
5105 Attempting to run the %1 script.
InformationNo action required.
5106 The %1 script ran successfully.
InformationNo action required.
5107 Error occurred in running %1 script.
ErrorVerify that the script identified exists with the proper permissions.
5108 The source machine %1 is not responding to a ping.
ErrorThis occurs when all monitored IP addresses on the source machine stop
responding to pings. Countdown to failover will begin at the first occurrence and will
continue until the source machine responds or until failover occurs.
5109 The public NIC on source machine %1 is not responding to a ping.
ErrorThe failover target did not receive an answer to its ping of the source machine.
Eventually, a failover will result. Investigate possible errors (down server, network
error, etc.).
5200 Failback completed for %1.
InformationNo action required.
5201 IP address %1 was removed from target machine's %2 adapter.
InformationNo action required.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 102

5202 Unable to Failback properly because IP address %1 was missing a corresponding
SubNet Mask.
ErrorContact technical support.
5300 The following IP address was added to target's monitoring list: %1
InformationNo action required.
5301 The following IP address was removed from target's monitoring list: %1
InformationNo action required.
5302 Drive share information for %1 has been updated on the target machine.
InformationNo action required.
5400 Broadcasted new MAC address %1 for IP address %2.
InformationNo action required.
5500 Could not connect to e-mail server. Check to make sure the SMTP server %1 is available
(error code: %2).
WarningDouble-Take could not connect to your SMTP server or the username
and/or password supplied is incorrect. Verify that SMTP server is available and that
you have identified it correctly in your e-mail notification configuration. Also verify that
your username and password have been entered correctly.
5501 E-mail notification could not be enabled (error code: %1).
WarningThis alert occurs if there is an unexpected error enabling e-mail notification
during service startup. Check to see if any other errors related to e-mail notification
have been logged. Also, check to make sure the Windows Management
Instrumentation (WMI) service is enabled. If neither of these apply, contact technical
support.
5502 E-mail notification could not be initialized. Check to make sure Internet Explorer 5.0 or
later is installed.
WarningE-mail notification no longer requires Internet Explorer 5.0 or later. If you
receive this error, contact technical support.
5503 E-mail notification could not be processed. Check to make sure the correct version of
SMTPMail.DLL is registered on the system (error code: %1).
WarningIf you are using Double-Take 4.4.2.1 or earlier and Windows NT 4.0, e-mail
notification requires Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) to be installed.
Verify that you have it installed on the Double-Take server.
5504 Could not load LocalRS.dll (for e-mail notification).
WarningThis alert occurs if there is an error loading the resource DLL for the service.
Typically, this is caused by a missing LocalRS.dll file. Reinstall the software, using the
installation Repair option, to install a new copy of the LocalRS.dll. Contact technical
support if this error persists.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 103

5505 E-mail could not be sent. Check e-mail settings (error code: %1).
WarningVerify that the e-mail server that you have identified in your e-mail
notification configuration is correct.
5506 One or more required e-mail settings have not been specified (error code: %1).
WarningAt a minimum, you must specify the e-mail server, the From and To
addresses, and at least one type of event to include.
5507 E-mail notification could not be initialized. Check to make sure WMI is installed and
available (error code: %1).
WarningIf you are using Double-Take 4.4.2.1 or earlier and Windows NT 4.0, e-mail
notification requires Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) to be installed.
Verify that you have it installed on the Double-Take server.
5508 An error occurred connecting to the WMI namespace. Check to make sure the Windows
Management Instrumentation service is not disabled (error code %1).
WarningThis alert occurs if there is an error with the Windows Management
Instrumentation (WMI) service. Verify that you have it installed on the Double-Take
server and that it is enabled.
5600 Part or all of the e-mail setting %1 is not in a valid format.
WarningVerify that the include categories and exclude ID list are identified and
formatted correctly.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 104

E-mailing system messages
You can e-mail system messages to specified addresses. The subject of the e-mail will contain an
optional prefix, the server name where the message was logged, the message ID, and the severity level
(information, warning, or error). The text of the message will be displayed in the body of the e-mail
message.
1. To enable e-mail notification for a server, right-click the server in the left pane of the Replication
Console and select Properties.
2. Select the E-mail Notification tab.

3. Select Enable notification.

Any specified notification settings are retained when Enable notification is disabled.

4. Specify your e-mail settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 105

 l Mail Server (SMTP)Specify the name of your SMTP mail server.

Specifying an SMTP server is the preferred method because it provides a direct

connection between the mail server and Double-Take Availability, which decreases
message latency and allows for better logging when the mail server cannot be
reached.

If you do not specify an SMTP server, Double-Take Availability will attempt to use
the Linux mail command. The success will depend on how the local mail system is
configured. Double-Take Availability will be able to reach any address that the mail
command can reach.

l Log on to SMTP ServerIf your SMTP server requires authentication, enable Log on
to SMTP Server and specify the Username and Password to be used for authentication.
Your SMTP server must support the LOGIN authentication method to use this feature. If
your server supports a different authentication method or does not support authentication,
you may need to add the Double-Take Availability server as an authorized host for relaying
e-mail messages. This option is not necessary if you are sending exclusively to e-mail
addresses that the SMTP server is responsible for.
l From AddressSpecify the e-mail address that you want to appear in the From field of
each Double-Take Availability e-mail message. The address is limited to 256 characters.
l Send ToSpecify the e-mail address that each Double-Take Availability e-mail message
should be sent to and click Add. The e-mail address will be inserted into the list of
addresses. Each address is limited to 256 characters. You can add up to 256 e-mail
addresses. If you want to remove an address from the list, highlight the address and click
Remove. You can also select multiple addresses to remove by Ctrl-clicking.
l Subject Prefix and Add event description to subjectThe subject of each e-mail
notification will be in the format Subject Prefix : Server Name : Message Severity : Message
ID : Message Description. The first and last components (Subject Prefix and Message
Description) are optional. The subject line is limited to 150 characters.
If desired, enter unique text for the Subject Prefix which will be inserted at the front of the
subject line for each Double-Take Availability e-mail message. This will help distinguish
Double-Take Availability messages from other messages. This field is optional.
If desired, enable Add event description to subject to have the description of the
message appended to the end of the subject line. This field is optional.
l Filter ContentsSpecify which messages that you want to be sent via e-mail. Specify
Information, Warning, and/or Error. You can also specify which messages to exclude
based on the message ID. Enter the message IDs as a comma or semicolon separated list.
You can indicate ranges within the list.

You can test e-mail notification by specifying the options on the E-mail Notification
tab and clicking Test. If desired, you can send the test message to a different e-mail
address by selecting Send To and entering a comma or semicolon separated list of
addresses. Modify the message text up to 1024 characters, if necessary. Click
Send to test the e-mail notification. The results will be displayed in a message box.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 106

 Click OK to close the message and click Close to return to the E-mail Notification
tab.

If an error occurs while sending an e-mail, a message will be generated. This

message will not trigger an e-mail. Subsequent e-mail errors will not generate
additional messages. When an e-mail is sent successfully, a message will then be
generated. If another e-mail fails, one message will again be generated. This is a
cyclical process where one message will be generated for each group of failed e-
mail messages, one for each group of successful e-mail messages, one for the next
group of failed messages, and so on.
If you start and then immediately stop the Double-Take daemon, you may not get e-
mail notifications for the log entries that occur during startup.
By default, most virus scan software blocks unknown processes from sending
traffic on port 25. You need to modify the blocking rule so that Double-Take
Availability e-mail messages are not blocked.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 107

Statistics
Statistics logging is the process of taking snapshots of Double-Take statistical data. The data can be
written to a file for future use. Changes to the statistics file configuration are detected and applied
immediately without restarting the Double-Take service.
The statistics log file created is a binary file. To view the log file, you must run the DTStat utility from the
command prompt.
Sample DTStat output

=================================
0/11/10 12:48:05:2040
=================================
SYSTEMALLOCATOR::Total Bytes: 0
IQALLOCATOR::Total Bytes: 0
SECURITY::Logins : 1 FailedLogins : 0
KERNEL::SourceState: 2 TargetState: 1 Start Time: Tue Sep 11 12:45:26 2007
RepOpsGenerated: 436845 RepBytesGenerated: 0
MirOpsGenerated: 3316423 MirBytesGenerated: 108352749214952
FailedMirrorCount: 0 FailedRepCount: 0
ActFailCount: 0 TargetOpenHandles: 0 DriverQueuePercent: 0
TARGET:: PeerAddress: 10.10.1.104 LocalAddress: 10.10.1.104
Ops Received: 25 Mirror Ops Received: 23
Retries: 0 OpsDropped: 0 Ops Remaining: 0
Orphan Files Removed: 0 Orphan Directories Removed: 0 Orphan Bytes Removed: 0
Bytes In Target Queue: 0 Bytes In Target Disk Queue: 0
TasksSucceeded: 0 TasksFailed: 0 TasksIgnored: 0
SOURCE::autoDisConnects : 0 autoReConnects : 1
lastFileTouched : /log/data_file
CONNECTION:: conPeerAddress: 10.10.1.104
connectTime: Tue Sep 11 12:45:34 2007
conState: 1 conOpsInCmdQueue: 0 conOpsInAckQueue: 0
conOpsInRepQueue: 0 conOpsInMirQueue: 0 conBytesInRepQueue: 0
conOpsTx: 27 conBytesInMirQueue: 0 conBytesTx: 14952687269
conBytesCompressedTx: 14952
conOpsRx: 201127 conBytesRx: 647062280 conResentOpCount: 0 conBytesInDiskQueue: 0
conBandwidthLimit: 429496295 conBytesSkipped: 22867624 conMirrorBytesRemain: 0
conMirrorPercent: 100.0%
conTaskCmdsSubmitted: 0 conTaskCmdsQueued: 0
conTasksSucceeded: 0 conTasksFailed: 0 conTasksIgnored: 0

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 108

Configuring the properties of the statistics file
1. Right-click a machine in the left pane of the Replication Console and select Properties.
2. Select the Logging tab.

3. At the top of the tab, specify the Folder where the log files for messages, alerts, verification, and
statistics will be saved.
4. Under Statistics, specify the following information.
l FilenameThe name of the statistics log file. The default file name is statistic.sts.

l Maximum LengthThe maximum length of the statistics log file. The default maximum

length is 10 MB. Once this maximum has been reached, Double-Take begins overwriting
the oldest data in the file.
l Write IntervalThe frequency in which Double-Take writes the statistical data to the

statistics log file. The default is every 5 minutes.

5. Select the Setup tab.
6. Verify that Log Statistics Automatically is enabled. If disabled, statistics will not be logged.
7. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 109

Viewing the statistics file
The statistics log file created is a binary file. To view the log file, you must run the DTStat utility from a
command prompt. From the directory where Double-Take is installed, run the DTStat command.

Command
DTSTAT
Description
Starts the DTStats statistics logging utility from a command prompt
Syntax
DTSTAT [-p][-i <interval>][-t <filename>] [-f <filename>] [-s <filename>] [-st
<filename>][-IP <address>] [-START <mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm>][-STOP
<mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm>] [-SERVER <ip_address> <port_number>]
Options
l -pDo not print the output to the screen
l -i intervalRefresh from shared memory every interval seconds
l -t filenameSave the data from memory to the specified binary file filename
l -f filenameReads from a previously saved binary file, filename, that was
generated using the -t option instead of reading from memory
l -s filenameSaves only the connection data from the data in memory to an ASCII,
comma-delimited file, filename
l -st filenameSaves only the target data from the data in memory to an ASCII,
comma-delimited file, filename
l -f filename1 -s filename2Saves only the connection data from a previously
saved binary file, filename1, to an ASCII, comma-delimited file, filename2
l -f filename1 -st filename2Saves only the target data from a previously saved
binary file, filename1, to an ASCII, comma-delimited file, filename2
l -IP addressFilters out the specified address in the IP address field and prints only
those entries. Specify more than one IP address by separating them by a comma.
l -START mm/dd/yyyy hh:mmFilters out any data prior to the specified date and
time
l -STOP mm/dd/yyyy hh:mmFilters out any data after the specified date and time
l -SERVER ip_address port_numberConnects DTStat to the specified IP
address using the specified port number instead of to the local machine
Examples
l DTStat -i 300
l DTStat -p -i 300 -t AlphaStats.sts
l DTStat -f AlphaStats.sts -s AlphaStats.csv -start 02/02/2007 09:25
l DTStat -server 206.31.4.51 1106

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 110

Notes
l This command is not case-sensitive.
l If no options are specified, DTStat will print the output to the screen at an interval of
every one second.
l If the statistics are not changing, DTStat will discontinue writing until statistics begin
updating again.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 111

Statistics
The following table identifies the Double-Take statistics.

The categories you see will depend on the function of your server (source, target, or both).

If you have multiple IP addresses connected to one target server, you will see multiple Target
sections for each IP address.
If you convert your statistics output to an ASCII, comma-delimited file using the dtstat -s option,
keep in mind the following differences.
l The statistic labels will be slightly different in the ASCII file than in the following table.
l The statistics will appear in a different order in the ASCII file than in the following table.
l The statistics in the Target Category in the following table are not included in the ASCII file.
l The Kernel statistic Target Open Handles is not included in the ASCII file.
l The ASCII file contains a Managed Pagefile Alloc statistic which is no longer used.

Date/Time Stamp
The date and time that the snapshot was taken. This is the date and time that each
statistic was logged. By default, these are generated once a second, as long as there
are statistics being generated. If mirroring/replication is idle, then DTStat will be idle as
well.
System Allocator, Total Bytes
The number of bytes currently allocated to the system pagefile
IQAllocator, Total Bytes
The number of bytes currently allocated to the intermediate queue
Security, Logins
The number of successful login attempts
Security, Failed Logins
The number of failed login attempts
Kernel, SourceState
l 0Source is not running
l 1Source is running without the replication driver
l 2Source is running with the replication driver

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 112

Kernel, TargetState
l 0Target is not running
l 1Target is running
Kernel, Start Time
Date and time stamp indicating when the Double-Take service was loaded
Kernel, RepOpsGenerated
The number of replication operations generated by the file system driver. An op is a file
system operation. Double-Take replicates data by sending the file system operations
across the network to the target. RepOpsGenerated indicates the number of file
system operations that have been generated by replication.
Kernel, RepBytesGenerated
The number of replication bytes generated by the file system driver. This is the number
of bytes generated during replication. In other words, this is roughly the amount of
traffic being sent across the network that is generated by replication. It does not take
into account TCP/IP overhead (headers and such).
Kernel, MirOpsGenerated
The number of mirror operations transmitted to the target. Mirroring is completed by
transmitting the file system operations necessary to generate the files on the target.
This statistic indicates the number of file system operations that were transmitted
during the initial mirror. It will continue to increase until the mirror is complete. Any
subsequent remirrors will reset this field to zero and increment from there.
Kernel, MirBytesGenerated
The number of mirror bytes transmitted to the target. This is the number of bytes
generated during mirroring. In other words, this is roughly the amount of traffic being
sent across the network that is generated by the mirror. It does not take into account
TCP/IP overhead (headers and such). Again, any subsequent remirror will reset this
field to zero and increment from there.
Kernel, FailedMirrorCount
The number of mirror operations that failed due to an error reading the file from the disk
Kernel, FailedRepCount
The number of replication operations that failed due to an error reading the file from the
disk
Kernel, ActFailCount
The number of license key failures when loading the source or target. License keys can
be bad for reasons such as: expiration of evaluation keys, duplicate keys, incorrect
keys, etc.
Kernel, TargetOpenHandles
The number of handles currently open on the target

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 113

Kernel, DriverQueuePercent
The amount of throttling calculated as a percentage of the stop replicating limit
Target, PeerAddress
The IP address of the source machine
Target, LocalAddress
The IP address of the target machine.
Target, Ops Received
The total number of operations received by this machine as a target since the Double-
Take service was loaded
Target, Mirror Ops Received
The total number of mirror operations received by this machine as a target since the
Double-Take service was loaded. This number does not reset to zero for remirrors.
Target, Retries
The number of retries performed before all operations were completed
Target, OpsDropped
The number of operations skipped during a difference mirror. During a difference
mirror, if Double-Take detects that there have been no changes to a file, then it will
indicate the number of operations it did not send for this file in this field.
Target, Ops Remaining
The total number of operations that are left in the target queue
Target, Orphan Files Removed
The number of orphan files removed from the target machine
Target, Orphan Directories Removed
The number of orphan directories removed from the target machine
Target, Orphan Bytes Removed
The number of orphan bytes removed from the target machine
Target, Bytes In Target Queue
The number of bytes currently in the system memory queue on the target
Target. Bytes In Target Disk Queue
The number of bytes currently in the disk queue on the target
Target, TasksSucceeded
The number of task commands that have succeeded on the target

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 114

Target, TasksFailed
The number of task commands that have failed on the target
Target, TasksIgnored
The number of task commands that have been ignored on the target
Source, autoDisConnects
The number of automatic disconnects since starting Double-Take. Auto-disconnects
occur because the source no longer sees the target This could be because the
connection between the two has failed at some point or because the target machine
data is changing on the source faster than the source can get the data to the target.
This field tracks the number of times an auto-disconnect has occurred since the
Double-Take service was started.
Source, autoReConnects
The number of automatic reconnects since starting Double-Take. Auto-reconnect
occurs after a target machine is back online. This field tracks the number of times an
auto-reconnect has happened since the Double-Take service was started.
Source, lastFileTouched
The last filename that had a replication operation executed
Connection, conPeerAddress
The IP address of the target machine
Connection, connectTime
The time that this connection was established
Connection, conState
The state of the active connection
l 0None. This indicates a connection has not been established. Statistics are still
available for the source and target machines.
l 1Active. This indicates that the connection is functioning normally and has no
scheduling restrictions imposed on it at this time. (There may be restrictions, but it is
currently in a state that allows it to transmit.)
l 2Paused. This indicates a connection that has been paused.
l 4Scheduled. This indicates a connection that is not currently transmitting due to
scheduling restrictions (bandwidth limitations, time frame limitations, and so on).
l 8Error. This indicates a connection that is not transmitting because something has
gone wrong (for example, lost connection).
Only the Scheduled and Error states can coexist. All other states are mutually
exclusive. Statistics will display a conState of 12 when the connection is in both a
scheduled and an error state because this is the sum of the two values (4 + 8).

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 115

Connection, conOpsInCmdQueue
The number of operations waiting to be executed on the target
Connection, conOpsInAckQueue
The number of operations waiting in the acknowledgement queue. Each operation that
is generated receives an acknowledgement from the target after that operation has
been received by the target. This statistic indicates the number of operations that have
yet to receive acknowledgement of receipt.
Connection, conOpsInRepQueue
The number of replication operations currently waiting to be executed on the target
Connection, conOpsInMirQueue
The number of mirror operations currently waiting to be executed on the target
Connection, conBytesInRepQueue
The number of replication bytes remaining to be transmitted to the target
Connection, conOpsTx
The number of operations transmitted to the target. This is the total number of
operations that Double-Take has transmitted as a source. In other words, the
cumulative number of operations transmitted by this source to all connected targets.
Connection, conBytesInMirQueue
The number of mirror bytes remaining to be transmitted to the target
Connection, conBytesTx
The number of bytes transmitted to the target. This is the total number of bytes that
Double-Take has transmitted as a source. In other words, the cumulative number of
bytes transmitted by this source to all connected targets.
Connection, conBytesCompressedTx
The number of compressed bytes transmitted to the target.
Connection, conOpsRx
The number of operations received by the target. The number of operations that the
target for this connection (as indicated by the IP address field) has received from this
source.
Connection, conBytesRx
The number of bytes received by the target. The number of bytes that the target for this
connection (as indicated by the IP address field) has received from this source.
Connection, conResentOpCount
The number of operations resent because they were not acknowledged

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 116

Connection, conBytesInDiskQueue
The number of bytes in the source disk queue
Connection, conBandwidthLimit
The amount of bandwidth that may be used to transfer data
Connection, conBytesSkipped
The number of bytes skipped during a difference mirror. During a difference mirror, if
Double-Take detects that there have been no changes to a file, then it will indicate the
number of bytes it did not send for this file in this field.
Connection, conMirrorBytesRemaining
The number of mirror bytes remaining to be transmitted
Connection, conMirrorPercent
The percentage of the mirror that has been completed. This field is determined if the
replication set size was calculated.
Connection, conTaskCmdsSubmitted
The number of task commands that have been submitted on the source
Connection, conTaskCmdsQueued
The number of task commands that have been queued on the source
Connection, conTasksSucceeded
The number of task commands that have succeeded on the source
Connection, conTasksFailed
The number of task commands that have failed on the source
Connection, conTasksIgnored
The number of task commands that have been ignored on the source

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 117

SNMP
SNMP, Simple Network Management Protocol, is the Internet's standard for remote monitoring and
management of hosts, routers and other nodes and devices on a network. Double-Take provides an
SNMP sub-agent that monitors Double-Take and can be managed from an SNMP Management
Console.
Double-Take installs two components to work with SNMP.
1. The sub-agent is a program that installs and runs on the same machine as Double-Take and
gathers statistics, data, and traps. The sub-agent forwards the information to the SNMP agent,
which relays the information to the manager. The Double-Take SNMP sub-agent is included in
the Double-Take installation program.
2. A Double-Take MIB file is placed on the administrators machine so that the management console
can interpret the data sent from the sub-agent. The Double-Take .mib file is NSI-DT.mib and
meets SNMP standards.

The Double-Take SNMPsub-agent is only supported for NET-SNMP v2c.

Ubuntu SNMP is not supported.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 118

Configuring SNMP on your server
SNMP must be installed, configured, and working on your server.
1. Install Double-Take, if it is not already installed.
2. Move the DTSupAgent_init script to /etc/init.d/DTSubAgent
# mv DTSubAgent_init /etc/init.d/DTSubAgent
# chmod 755 /etc/init.d/DTSubAgent
3. Install the NET-SNMP service, libs, and utils rpm, if they are not already installed.
# yum install net-snmp net-snmp-utils
4. Make a backup copy of the SNMP configuration file snmpd.conf.
# cp /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf.orig
5. Edit the snmpd.conf file and insert the following line with the view definitions.
view systemview included .1.3.6.1.4.1.2592
6. Append the following lines to the end of the file, where <SNMP Manager IP> is the IP address
where the SNMP manager is being run.
master agentx
trapcommunity public
trapsink <SNMP Manager IP>

If your snmpd.conf file is empty, add the following content to the file, where <SNMP
Manager IP> is the IP address where the SNMP manager is being run.

com2sec nsiUser default public

group nsiGroup v1nsiUser
group nsiGroup v2c nsiUser
view all included .1
access nsiGroup "" any noauth exact all all all
rocommunity public 127.0.0.1
master agentx
trapcommunity public
trapsink <SNMP Manager IP>

7. Create or edit /usr/share/snmp/snmp.conf and add the following lines.

mibdirs +/usr/share/snmp/mibs
mibs +NSI-MIB

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 119

 8. Edit the shell script /etc/init.d/snmpd and insert the following in the OPTIONSline.
-x /var/agentx/master"
It should now be similar to this.
OPTIONS="-x /var/agentx/master -LS0-6d -Lf /dev/null -p /var/run/snmpd.pid"
9. Install and start the snmpd and DTSubAgent services by running the following commands.
# chkconfig --add snmpd
# chkconfig snmpd on
# service snmpd start
# chkconfig --add DTSubAgent
# chkconfig DTSubAgent on
# service DTSubAgent start
10. Reboot the system to ensure that the latest versions of the Net-SNMP libraries are loaded and
that the snmpd and DTSubAgent services start as expected.
11. Confirm that the agents are configured correctly. The output should be similar to the text below
the command.
# snmpget -v2c -c public localhost dtGeneral.dtUpTime.0
NSI-MIB::dtUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (586000) 1:37:40.00
If the output says that the object could not be found, confirm that the snmpd.conf has "public" as
the community specified in the line beginning "com2sec". If it uses a different value, try that value
in the snmpget command above.
12. Once you have this working, you should change the community string to a custom value for
security reasons. DTSubAgent only supports v2c so SNMP user credentials cannot be used.
13. Confirm that the SNMP monitor is configured to receive traps remotely by stopping/starting the
DTSubAgent service after the monitor is set up.
# service DTSubAgent restart
This will generate traps for Double-Take events gathered from the latest log such as
dttrapKernelStarted (OID 1).

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 120

SNMP traps
The following table lists the Double-Take SNMP traps.

Kernel, dttrapKernelStarted
Double-Take has started
Kernel, dttrapKernelStopped
Double-Take has stopped
License, dttrapLicenseViolationStartingSource
The source cannot be started due to a license violation
License, dttrapLicenseViolationOnNetwork
A Double-Take serial number conflict was identified on the network
Source, dttrapSourceStarted
Double-Take source component has started
Source, dttrapSourceStopped
Double-Take source component has stopped
Target, dttrapTargetStarted
Double-Take target component has started
Target, dttrapTargetStopped
Double-Take target component has stopped
Connection, dttrapConnectionRequested
The source has requested a connection to the target
Connection, dttrapConnectionRequestReceived
The target has received a connection request from the source
Connection, dttrapConnectionSucceeded
The source to target connection has been established
Connection, dttrapConnectionPause
The source to target connection has paused
Connection, dttrapConnectionResume
The source to target connection has resumed

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 121

Connection, dttrapConnectionFailed
The source to target connection was not successful
Connection, dttrapConnectionLost
The source to target connection has been disconnected
Connection, dttrapMemoryLimitReached
The Double-Take memory pool limit has been reached
Connection, dttrapMemoryLimitRemedied
The memory pool usage is below the maximum limit specified
Connection, dttrapAutoReconnect
Auto-reconnect needs to make a new connection
Connection, dttrapScheduledConnectStart
A scheduled connection has been established
Connection, dttrapScheduledConnectEnd
A scheduled end connection has been reached and the connection has been
disconnected
Connection, dttrapAutoDisconnectWriteQueue
Auto-disconnect has forced the queue to be written to disk
Connection, dttrapAutoDisconnectPauseTransmission
Auto-disconnect requested that the source pause any operation (create, modify, or
delete) sending
Connection, dttrapAutoDisconnectEndConnection
Auto-disconnect has intentionally dropped the connection
Connection, dttrapAutoDisconnectShutdown
Auto-disconnect forced Double-Take to shutdown
Replication, dttrapReplicationStart
Replication has started
Replication, dttrapReplicationStop
Replication has stopped
Mirroring, dttrapMirrorStart
Mirroring has started
Mirroring, dttrapMirrorStop
Mirroring has stopped

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 122

Mirroring, dttrapMirrorPause
Mirroring has paused
Mirroring, dttrapMirrorResume
Mirroring has resumed
Mirroring, dttrapMirrorEnd
Mirroring has ended
Verification, dttrapVerificationStart
Verification has started
Verification, dttrapVerificationEnd
Verification has ended
Verification, dttrapVerificationFailure
Verification has failed
Restoration, dttrapRestoreStarted
Restoration has started
Restoration, dttrapRestoreComplete
Restoration is complete
Replication Sets, dttrapRepSetModified
Replication has been modified
Failover, dttrapFailoverConditionMet
Manual intervention is required because failover has detected a failed source machine
Failover, dttrapFailoverInProgress
Failover is occurring
Failover, dttrapTargetFull
The target is full

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 123

SNMP statistics
The following table lists the Double-Take SNMP statistics.

General, dtUpTime
Time in seconds since Double-Take was last started
General, dtCurrentMemoryUsage
Amount of memory allocated from the Double-Take memory pool
General, dtMirOpsGenerated
The number of mirror operations (create, modify, or delete) that have been transmitted
by the mirroring process
General, dtMirBytesGenerated
The number of bytes that have been transmitted by the mirroring process
General, dtRepOpsGenerated
The number of operations (create, modify, or delete) that have been transmitted by the
replication process
General, dtRepBytesGenerated
The number of bytes that have been transmitted by the replication process
General, dtFailedMirrorCount
The number of operations that failed to mirror because they could not be read on the
source
General, dtFailedRepCount
The number of operations that failed to be replicated because they could not be read on
the source
General, dtActFailCount
The number of license key errors
General, dtAutoDisCount
The number of auto-disconnects
General, dtAutoReCount
The number of auto-reconnects
General, dtDriverQueuePercent
The amount of throttling calculated as a percentage of the stop replicating limit

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 124

Source, dtSourceState
0Source is not running
1Source is running without the replication driver
2Source is running with the replication driver.
Target, dtTargetState
0Target is not running
1Target is running
Target, dtRetryCount
The number of file operations that have been retried
Target, dtOpsDroppedCount
The number of file operations that have failed and will not be retried
Security, dtLoginCount
The number of successful logins
Security, dtFailedLoginCount
The number of unsuccessful logins
Connection, dtConnectionCount
The number of active connections from the source to a target
Connection, dtconIpAddress
The IP address of the connected machine. If at the source, then the IP address of the
target. If at the target, then the IP address of the source.
Connection, dtconConnectTime
The duration of time since the connection was first established
Connection, dtconState
The state of the active connection
0None. This indicates a connection has not been established. Statistics are still
available for the source and target machines.
1Active. This indicates that the connection is functioning normally and has no
scheduling restrictions imposed on it at this time. (There may be restrictions, but it is
currently in a state that allows it to transmit.)
2Paused. This indicates a connection that has been paused.
4Scheduled. This indicates a connection that is not currently transmitting due to
scheduling restrictions (bandwidth limitations, time frame limitations, and so on).

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 125

 8Error. This indicates a connection that is not transmitting because something has
gone wrong (for example, lost connection).
Only the Scheduled and Error states can coexist. All other states are mutually
exclusive. SNMP will display a dtconState of 12 when the connection is in both a
scheduled and an error state because this is the sum of the two values (4 + 8).
Connection, dtconOpsInCmdQueue
The number of operations (create, modify, or delete) in the retransmit queue on the
source
Connection, dtconOpsInAckQueue
The number of operations (create, modify, or delete) waiting for verification
acknowledgements from the target
Connection, dtconOpsInRepQueue
The number of replication operations (create, modify, or delete) in the queue
Connection, dtconOpsInMirQueue
The number of mirror operations (create, modify, or delete) in the queue
Connection, dtconBytesInRepQueue
The number of bytes in the replication queue
Connection, dtconBytesInMirQueue
The number of bytes in the mirror queue
Connection, dtconOpsTx
The total number of operations (create, modify, or delete) transmitted to the target
Connection, dtconBytesTx
The total number of bytes transmitted to the target
Connection, dtconBytesCompressedTx
The total number of compressed bytes transmitted to the target
Connection, dtconOpsRx
The total number of operations (create, modify, or delete) received from the target
Connection, dtconBytesRx
The total number of bytes received from the target
Connection, dtconResentOpCount
The number of operations that were resent because of acknowledgement errors

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 126

Connections
A unique connection ID is associated with each Double-Take connection. The connection ID provides a
reference point for each connection. The connection ID is determined by sequential numbers starting at
one (1). Each time a connection is established, the ID counter is incremented. It is reset back to one
each time the Double-Take daemon is restarted. For example, if the Double-Take daemon was started
and the same replication set was connected to five target machines, each connection would have a
unique connection ID from 1 to 5. The connection can be in various states.
l StartedThe network connection exists and is available for data transmission. Replication and
mirror data are transmitted to the target as soon as possible. This is the standard state that you
will see most often.
l StoppedDouble-Take has linked the source and target, but the network connection does not
exist. Replication and mirror data are not transmitted to the target but are held in queue on the
source.
l PausedThe network connection exists and is available for data transmission, but the replication
and mirror data is being held in a queue and is not being transmitted to the target.
l ScheduledDouble-Take has linked the source and target, but the network connection is not
established until event driven or scheduling criteria have been met.
l ErrorA transmission error has occurred. Possible errors include a broken physical line or a
failed target daemon.
You can perform the following functions to manage your connections.
l Queuing data on page 130
l Reconnecting automatically on page 135
l Pausing and resuming target processing on page 136
l Disconnecting a connection on page 137

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 127

Data queues
During the Double-Take installation, you identified the amount of disk space that can be used for
Double-Take queuing. Queuing to disk allows Double-Take to accommodate high volume processing
that might otherwise fill up system memory. For example, on the source, this may occur if the data is
changing faster than it can be transmitted to the target, or on the target, a locked file might cause
processing to backup.
The following diagram will help you understand how queuing works. Each numbered step is described
after the diagram.

1. If data cannot immediately be transmitted to the target, it is stored, or queued, in system memory.
You can configure how much system memory you want to use for queuing. By default, 128 or 512
MB of memory is used, depending on your operating system.
2. When the allocated amount of system memory is full, new changed data bypasses the full system
memory and is queued directly to disk. Data queued to disk is written to a transaction log. Each
transaction log can store 5 MB worth of data. Once the log file limit has been reached, a new
transaction log is created. The logs can be distinguished by the file name which includes the target
IP address, the Double-Take port, the connection ID, and an incrementing sequence number.

You may notice transaction log files that are not the defined size limit. This is because data
operations are not split. For example, if a transaction log has 10 KB left until the limit and
the next operation to be applied to that file is greater than 10 KB, a new transaction log file
will be created to store that next operation. Also, if one operation is larger than the defined
size limit, the entire operation will be written to one transaction log.

3. When system memory is full, the most recent changed data is added to the disk queue, as
described in step 2. This means that system memory contains the oldest data. Therefore, when
data is transmitted to the target, Double-Take pulls the data from system memory and sends it.
This ensures that the data is transmitted to the target in the same order it was changed on the
source. Double-Take automatically reads operations from the oldest transaction log file into
system memory. As a transaction log is depleted, it is deleted. When all of the transaction log files
are deleted, data is again written directly to system memory (step 1).

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 128

 4. To ensure the integrity of the data on the target, the information must be applied in the same order
as it was on the source. If there are any delays in processing, for example because of a locked file,
a similar queuing process occurs on the target. Data that cannot immediately be applied is queued
to system memory. By default, 128 or 512 MB of memory is used, depending on your operating
system.
5. When the allocated amount of system memory on the target is full, new incoming data bypasses
the full system memory and is queued directly to disk. Data queued to disk is written to a
transaction log. On the target, the transaction logs are identified with the source IP address, the
Double-Take port, the connection ID, and an incrementing sequence number.
Like the source, system memory on the target contains the oldest data so when data is applied to the
target, Double-Take pulls the data from system memory. Double-Take automatically moves operations
from the oldest transaction log file to system memory. As a transaction log is depleted, it is deleted.
When all of the transaction log files are deleted, data is again written directly to system memory (step 4).

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 129

Queuing data
You should configure queuing on both the source and target.
1. Right-click the server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Queue tab.
4. Specify the queue settings for the server.

l FolderThis is the location where the disk queue will be stored. Double-Take Availability
displays the amount of free space on the volume selected. Any changes made to the queue
location will not take effect until the Double-Take daemon has been restarted on the server.
Select a location on a volume that will have minimal impact on the operating system and
applications being protected. For best results and reliability, this should be a dedicated,
non-boot volume. The disk queue should not be on the same physical or logical volume as
the data being replicated.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 130

 Scanning the Double-Take Availability queue files for viruses can cause
unexpected results. If anti-virus software detects a virus in a queue file and deletes
or moves it, data integrity on the target cannot be guaranteed. As long as you have
your anti-virus software configured to protect the actual production data, the anti-
virus software can clean, delete, or move an infected file and the clean, delete, or
move will be replicated to the target. This will keep the target from becoming
infected and will not impact the Double-Take Availability queues.

l Maximum system memory for queueThis is the amount of system memory, in MB,
that will be used to store data in queues. When exceeded, queuing to disk will be triggered.
This value is dependent on the amount of physical memory available but has a minimum of
32 MB. By default, 128 MB of memory is used. If you set it lower, Double-Take Availability
will use less system memory, but you will queue to disk sooner which may impact system
performance. If you set it higher, Double-Take Availability will maximize system
performance by not queuing to disk as soon, but the system may have to swap the memory
to disk if the system memory is not available.
Since the source is typically running a production application, it is important that the amount
of memory Double-Take Availability and the other applications use does not exceed the
amount of RAM in the system. If the applications are configured to use more memory than
there is RAM, the system will begin to swap pages of memory to disk and the system
performance will degrade. For example, by default an application may be configured to use
all of the available system memory when needed, and this may happen during high-load
operations. These high-load operations cause Double-Take Availability to need memory to
queue the data being changed by the application. In this case, you would need to configure
the applications so that they collectively do not exceed the amount of RAM on the server.
Perhaps on a server with 1 GB of RAM running the application and Double-Take
Availability, you might configure the application to use 512 MB and Double-Take Availability
to use 256 MB, leaving 256 MB for the operating system and other applications on the
system. Many server applications default to using all available system memory, so it is
important to check and configure applications appropriately, particularly on high-capacity
servers.
Any changes to the memory usage will not take effect until the Double-Take daemon has
been restarted on the server.
l Maximum disk space for queueThis is the maximum amount of disk space, in MB, in
the specified Folder that can be used for Double-Take Availability disk queuing, or you can
select Unlimited which will allow the queue usage to automatically expand whenever the
available disk space expands. When the disk space limit is reached, Double-Take
Availability will automatically begin the auto-disconnect process. By default, Double-Take
Availability will use an unlimited amount of disk space. Setting this value to zero (0) disables
disk queuing.
l Minimum Free SpaceThis is the minimum amount of disk space in the specified Folder
that must be available at all times. By default, 50 MB of disk space will always remain free.
The Minimum Free Space should be less than the amount of physical disk space minus
Maximum disk space for queue.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 131

 The Maximum disk space for queue and Minimum Free Space settings work
in conjunction with each other. For example, assume your queues are stored on a
10 GB disk with the Maximum disk space for queue set to 10 GB and the
Minimum Free Space set to 500 MB. If another program uses 5 GB, Double-Take
Availability will only be able to use 4.5 GB so that 500 MB remains free.

l Alert at following queue usage percentageThis is the percentage of the disk queue
that must be in use to trigger an alert message in the Double-Take Availability log. By
default, the alert will be generated when the queue reaches 50%.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 132

Auto-disconnect and auto-reconnect
While disk queues are user configurable and can be extensive, they are limited. If the amount of disk
space specified for disk queuing is met, additional data could not be added to the queue and data would
be lost. To avoid any data loss, the auto-disconnect and auto-reconnect processes occur.
l Exhausted queues on the sourceIf disk queuing is exhausted on the source, Double-Take
will automatically start disconnecting connections. This is called auto-disconnect. The transaction
logs and system memory are flushed allowing Double-Take to begin processing anew. The auto-
reconnect process ensures that any connections that were auto-disconnected are automatically
reconnected. Then, if configured, Double-Take will automatically remirror the data. This process
is called auto-remirror. The remirror re-establishes the target baseline to ensure data integrity, so
disabling auto-remirror is not advised.
l Exhausted queues on the targetIf disk queuing is exhausted on the target, the target
instructs the source to pause. The source will automatically stop transmitting data to the target
and will queue the data changes. When the target recovers, it will automatically tell the source to
resume sending data. If the target does not recover by the time the source queues are exhausted,
the source will auto-disconnect as described above. The transaction logs and system memory
from the source will be flushed then Double-Take will auto-reconnect. If configured, Double-Take
will auto-remirror. The remirror re-establishes the target baseline to ensure data integrity, so
disabling auto-remirror is not advised.
l Queuing errorsIf there are errors during disk queuing on either the source or target, for
example, Double-Take cannot read from or write to the transaction log file, the data integrity
cannot be guaranteed. To prevent any loss of data, the source will auto-disconnect and auto-
reconnect. If configured, Double-Take will auto-remirror. The remirror re-establishes the target
baseline to ensure data integrity, so disabling auto-remirror is not advised.
l Target server interruptionIf a target machine experiences an interruption (such as a cable or
NIC failure), the source/target network connection is physically broken but both the source and
target maintain the connection information. The Double-Take source, not being able to
communicate with the Double-Take target, stops transmitting data to the target and queues the
data changes, similar to the exhausted target queues described above. When the interruption is
resolved and the physical source/target connection is reestablished, the source begins sending
the queued data to the target. If the source/target connection is not reestablished by the time the
source queues are exhausted, the source will auto-disconnect as described above.
l Target daemon shutdownIf the target daemon is stopped and restarted, there could have
been data in the target queue when the daemon was stopped. To prevent any loss of data, the
Double-Take daemon will attempt to persist to disk important target connection information (such
as the source and target IP addresses for the connection, various target queue information, the
last acknowledged operation, data in memory moved to disk, and so on) before the daemon is
stopped. If Double-Take is able to successfully persist this information, when the Double-Take
daemon on the target is restarted, Double-Take will pick up where it left off, without requiring an
auto-disconnect, auto-reconnect, or auto-remirror. If Double-Take cannot successfully persist this
information prior to the restart (for example, a server crash or power failure where the target
daemon cannot shutdown gracefully), the source will auto-reconnect when the target is available,
and if configured, Double-Take will auto-remirror. The remirror re-establishes the target baseline
to ensure data integrity, so disabling auto-remirror is not advised.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 133

 If you are experiencing frequent auto-disconnects, you may want to increase the amount
of disk space on the volume where the Double-Take queue is located or move the disk
queue to a larger volume. See Queuing data on page 130.

If you have changed data on the target while not failed over, for example if you were
testing data on the target, Double-Take is unaware of the target data changes. You must
manually remirror your data from the source to the target, overwriting the target data
changes that you caused, to ensure data integrity between your source and target.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 134

Reconnecting automatically
Use the following steps to configure automatic reconnections.
1. Right-click the source server on the left pane of the Replication Console and select Properties.
2. Select the Setup tab.

3. Verify that the check box Automatically Reconnect During Source Initialization is marked to
enable the auto-reconnect feature.
4. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 135

Pausing and resuming target processing
You can break the source/target connection without disconnecting the connection, so that you can
control the transmission of data across the network. You can do this by pausing the target. If the target is
paused, data is queued on the source until you manually resume the target. For example, you may want
to pause the target while you perform a backup of the target data, and then resume the target when the
backup is complete.
While the target is paused, the Double-Take source cannot queue data indefinitely. If the source queue
is filled, Double-Take will automatically disconnect the connections and attempt to reconnect them. See
Reconnecting automatically on page 135.
To pause a target, right-click a target server on the left pane of the Replication Console and select
Pause Target. All active connections to that target will complete the operations already in progress.
You will see Pause Pending in the Replication Console while these operations are completed. The
status will update to Paused after the operations are completed. Any new operations will be queued on
the source until the target is resumed. When you are ready to resume the target, right-click the target
and select Resume Target.

If you have multiple connections to the same target, all connections will be paused and resumed.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 136

Disconnecting a connection
To disconnect a Double-Take connection, right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication
Console and select Disconnect. The source and target will be disconnected.

If a connection is disconnected and the target is monitoring the source for failover, you will be
prompted if you would like to continue monitoring for a failure. If you select Yes, the Double-
Take connection will be disconnected, but the target will continue monitoring the source. To
make modifications to the failure monitoring, you will need to use the Failover Control Center. If
you select No, the Double-Take connection will be disconnected, and the source will no longer
be monitored for failure by the target.

If a connection is disconnected while large amounts of data still remain in queue, the Replication
Console may become unresponsive while the data is being flushed. The Replication Console
will respond when all of the data has been flushed from the queue.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 137

Mirroring
Mirroring is one of the key components of Double-Take. You can perform the following functions to
manage mirroring.
l Stopping, starting, pausing, or resuming mirroring on page 139
l Mirroring automatically on page 141
l Removing orphan files on page 143

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 138

Stopping, starting, pausing, or resuming mirroring
After a connection is established, you need to be able to control the mirroring. You can start, stop, pause
and resume mirroring. Right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select
Mirroring and the appropriate mirror control.
l Pause or ResumeWhen pausing a mirror, Double-Take stops queuing mirror data on the
source but maintains a pointer to determine what information still needs to be mirrored to the
target. Therefore, when resuming a paused mirror, the process continues where it left off.
l StopWhen stopping a mirror, Double-Take stops queuing mirror data on the source and does
not maintain a pointer to determine what information still needs to be mirrored to the target.
Therefore, when starting a mirror that has been stopped, the process will mirror all of the data
contained in the replication set.
l StartIf you select to start a mirror, you will need to make the following two selections on the
Start Mirror dialog box.
l Full MirrorAll files in the replication set will be sent from the source to the target.

l File differencesOnly those files that are different based size or date and time will be

sent from the source to the target. Expand File difference mirror options compared below to
see how the file difference mirror settings work together, as well as how they work with the
global checksum setting on the Source tab of the Server Properties.
l Send data only if Source is newer than TargetOnly those files that are newer on the

source are sent to the target.

If you are using a database application, do not use the newer option unless you
know for certain you need it. With database applications, it is critical that all files, not
just some of them that might be newer, get mirrored.

l Use block checksumFor those files flagged as different, the mirror performs a
checksum comparison and only sends those blocks that are different.
l Calculate Replication Set size prior to mirrorDetermines the size of the replication set
prior to starting the mirror. The mirroring status will update the percentage complete if the
replication set size is calculated.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 139

File difference mirror options compared
l File DifferencesAny file that is different on the source and target based on the date, time,
and/or size is transmitted to the target. The mirror sends the entire file.
l File Differences and Only if Source is NewerAny file that is newer on the source than on
the target based on date and/or time is transmitted to the target. The mirror sends the entire file.
l File Differences and ChecksumThis option is dependent on the global checksum all option
on the Server Properties source tab.
l Checksum All disabled Any file that is different on the source and target based on

date, time, and/or size is flagged as different. The mirror then performs a checksum
comparison on the flagged files and only sends those blocks that are different.
l Checksum All enabledThe mirror performs a checksum comparison on all files and

only sends those blocks that are different.

l File Differences, Only if Source is Newer, and ChecksumAny file that is newer on the
source than on the target based on date and/or time is flagged as different. The mirror then
performs a checksum comparison on the flagged files and only sends those blocks that are
different.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 140

Mirroring automatically
In certain circumstances, for example if the disk-based queues on the source are exhausted, Double-
Take will automatically disconnect connections (called auto-disconnect) and then automatically
reconnect them (called auto-reconnect). In order to ensure data integrity on the target, Double-Take will
perform an automatic mirror (called an auto-remirror) after an auto-reconnect.

Auto-remirror is a per source option. When enabled, all connections from the source will perform
an auto-remirror after an auto-reconnect. When disabled, none of the connections from the
source will perform an auto-remirror after an auto-reconnect.

1. Right-click a server in the left pane of the Replication Console and select Properties.
2. Select the Setup tab.

3. Verify that the Perform Remirror After Auto-Reconnect check box is selected to initiate an
auto-remirror after an auto-reconnect.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 141

 If auto-remirror is disabled and an auto-reconnect occurs, the transmission state of the
connection will remain pending after the reconnect until a mirror is started manually.

4. Specify the type of mirror that you wish to perform.

l Differences with ChecksumAny file that is different on the source and target based on

date, time, and/or size is flagged as different. The mirror then performs a checksum
comparison on the flagged files and only sends those blocks that are different.
l Differences with no ChecksumAny file that is different on the source and target based

on date, time, and/or size is sent to the target.

l FullAll files are sent to the target.

Database applications may update files without changing the date, time, or file size.
Therefore, if you are using database applications, you should use the Differences
with checksum or Full option.

Stopping, starting, pausing, or resuming mirroring contains a comparison of how

the file difference remirror settings work together, as well as how they work with the
global checksum setting on the Source tab of the Server Properties.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 142

Removing orphan files
An orphan file is a file that exists in the targets copy of the replication set data, but it does not exist in the
source replication set data. An orphan file can be created when you delete a file contained in the source
replication set while there is no Double-Take connection. For example, if a connection was made and a
mirror was completed and then the connection was stopped and a file was deleted on the source, an
orphan file will exist on the target. Because the connection has been disconnected, the delete operation
is not replicated to the target and the file is not deleted on the target. Additionally, orphan files may also
exist if files were manually copied into or deleted from the location of the targets copy of the replication
set data.
You can configure orphan files to be moved or deleted automatically during a mirror, verify, or restore, or
you can move or delete orphan files manually at any time. You can move or delete all orphan files on the
target or only those orphan files that are older than a specified period of time. The results of orphan
processing are maintained in the Double-Take log on the target, including the number of moved/deleted
orphan files, the directories, and the number of bytes.

Orphan file configuration is a per target option. All connections to the same target will have the
same orphan file configuration.

If Double-Take is configured to move orphan files, the Double-Take log file will indicate that
orphan files have been deleted even though they have actually been moved. This is a reporting
issue only.
If delete orphans is enabled, carefully review any replication set rules that use wildcard
definitions. If you have specified wildcards to be excluded from your replication set, files
matching those wildcards will also be excluded from orphan file processing and will not be
deleted from the target. However, if you have specified wildcards to be included in your
replication, those files that fall outside the wildcard inclusion rule will be considered orphans and
will be deleted from the target.

1. If you want to preview which files are identified as orphan files, right-click an established
connection and select Remove Orphans, Preview. Check the log file on the target for the list of
orphaned files.
2. If you want to remove orphan files manually, right-click an established connection and select
Remove Orphans, Start.
3. If you want to stop the process after it has been started, right-click the connection and select
Remove Orphans, Stop.
4. To configure orphan files for processing during a mirror, verify, or restore, use the following
instructions.
a. Right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select
Connection Manager.
b. Select the Orphans tab.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 143

 c. Specify if you want to log the name of the orphan files to the Double-Take log file on the
target by marking Log Orphaned Files to Target Log.
d. By default, the orphan files feature is disabled. To enable it, mark Move/Delete Orphan
Files.
e. Specify if you want to Delete Orphaned Files or Move Orphaned Files to a different
location. If you select the move option, identify the location where these orphan files will be
located.

If you are moving or deleting orphan files, select a move location outside of the
replication set. If you select the location where the files are currently located, the
files will be deleted. If you select another location inside the replication set, the files
will be moved multiple times and then possibly deleted.

f. Specify if you want to Remove All Orphans or Remove Orphans not modified within
the following time period. If you select the time-based option, only orphans older than
the time you specify will be removed.
g. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 144

Replication
Replication is one of the key components of Double-Take. This section contains the following replication
topics.
l Replication capabilities on page 146Review this list to learn what Double-Take supports for
replication.
l Replication sets on page 148This section contains instructions for creating and using Double-
Take replication sets.
l Starting replication on page 162Since replication is one of the key components of Double-Take,
this topic includes instructions for starting replication.
l Inserting tasks during replication on page 163You can insert tasks to be processed inline with
replication.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 145

Replication capabilities
Double-Take replicates all file and directory data in the supported Linux file systems. Double-Take does
not replicate items that are not stored on the file system, such as pseudo-file systems like /proc and /sys.
In addition, note the following.
l Double-Take is compatible with NFS and Samba services as long as they are mounted on top of
Double-Take. Additionally, NFS and Samba should be started after the Double-Take daemon.
l If you select data stored on a recursive mount point for replication, a mirror will never finish.
Double-Take does not check for data stored on recursive mount points.
l If any directory or file contained in your replication set specifically denies permission to the account
running the Double-Take daemon, the attributes of the file on the target will not be updated
because of the lack of access.
l If you are using soft links, keep in mind the following.
l If a soft link to a directory is part of a replication set rules path above the entry point to the

replication set data, that link will be created on the target as a regular directory if it must be
created as part of the target path.
l If a soft link exists in a replication set (or is moved into a replication set) and points to a file or

directory inside the replication set, Double-Take will remap the path contained in that link
based on the Double-Take target path when the option RemapLink is set to the default
value (1). If RemapLink is set to zero (0), the path contained in the link will retain its original
mapping.
l If a soft link exists in a replication set (or is moved into a replication set) and points to a file or

directory outside the replication set, the path contained in that link will retain its original
mapping and is not affected by the RemapLink option.
l If a soft link is moved out of or deleted from a replication set on the source, that link will be

deleted from the target.

l If a soft link to a file is copied into a replication set on the source and the operating system

copies the file that the link pointed to rather than the link itself, then Double-Take replicates
the file copied by the operating system to the target. If the operating system does not follow
the link, only the link is copied.
l If a soft link to a directory is copied into a replication set on the source and the operating

system copies the directory and all of its contents that the link pointed to rather than the link
itself, then Double-Take replicates the directory and its contents copied by the operating
system to the target. If the operating system does not follow the link, only the link is copied.
l If any operating system commands, such as chmod or chown, is directed at a soft link on

the source and the operating system redirects the action to the file or directory which the
link references, then if the file or directory referenced by the link is in a replication set, the
operation will be replicated for that file to the target.
l The operating system redirects all writes to soft links to the file referenced by the link.

Therefore, if the file referenced by the symbolic link is in a replication set, the write operation
will be replicated to the target.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 146

 l If you are using hard links, keep in mind the following.
l If a hard link exists (or is created) only inside the replication set on the source, having no

locations outside the replication set, the linked file will be mirrored to the target for all
locations and those locations will be linked if all link locations on the target exist on the same
partition.
l If a hard link crosses the boundaries of a replication set on the source, having locations both

inside and outside the replication set, the linked file will be mirrored to the target for only
those locations inside the replication set on the source, and those locations will be linked on
the target if all link locations exist on the same partition.
l If a hard link is created on the source linking a file outside the replication set to a location

inside the replication set, the linked file will be created on the target in the location defined
by the link inside the replication set and will be linked to any other locations for that file which
exist inside the replication set.
l If any hard link location is moved from outside the replication set into the replication set on

the source, the link will not be replicated to the target even if other link locations already
exist inside the replication set, but the linked file will be created on the target in the location
defined by the link.
l If any hard link location existing inside the replication set is moved within the replication set

on the source, the move will be replicated to the target and the link will be maintained if the
new link location does not cross partitions in the target path.
l If any hard link location existing inside the replication set is moved out of the replication set,

that file or linked location will be deleted on the target.

l If a hard linked file is copied from any location inside or outside the replication set to a

location inside the replication set on the source, the copy will be replicated to the target.
l If a hard linked file has a location in the replication set and any of the operating system

commands, such as chmod or chown, are directed at that file from a location inside the
replication set, the modification to the file will be replicated to the target. Operations on hard
links outside of the replication set are not replicated.
l If a hard linked file has a location in the replication set and a write operation is directed at

that file from inside the replication set, the write operation will be replicated to the target.
Operations on hard links outside of the replication set are not replicated.
l If any hard link location existing inside the replication set is deleted on the source, that file or

linked location will be deleted from the target.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 147

Replication sets
A replication set defines the data on a source machine that Double-Take protects. Replication sets are
defined by volumes, directories, files, or wild card combinations. Creating multiple replication sets allows
you to customize sets of data that need to be protected.
When a replication set is created, a series of rules are defined that identify the volumes, directories, files,
and/or wild card combinations that will be replicated to the target. Each rule includes:
l PathThe path including volume, drive, directory, file, and/or wild card
l IncludeIf the specified path is to be included in the files sent to the target
l ExcludeIf the specified path is not to be included in the files sent to the target
l RecursiveIf the rule should automatically be applied to the subdirectories of the specified path
For example, a replication set rule might be volume\directory\* inc, rec
This specifies that all files contained in the volume\directory path are included in the replication set.
Because recursion is set, all files and subdirectories under volume\directory are also included. A
complete replication set becomes a list of replication set rules.
Replication sets offer flexibility tailoring Double-Take to your environment. For example, multiple
replication sets can be created and saved for a source to define a unique network configuration. There
may be three replication sets - Critical Data, User Data, and Offsite Data. Critical Data could be
configured to replicate, in real-time, to an onsite high-availability server. Offsite Data is replicated across
a WAN and, therefore, is configured to queue changes until a sufficient amount of data is changed to
justify transmission. At that point, the connection is made and stays active until all the data is transmitted.
User Data is not replicated throughout the day, but a nightly changed file mirror copies only blocks of
data that are different between the source and target server prior to a nightly tape backup operation
being run on the target server. Each of these replication sets can be automated to transmit as needed,
thus protecting your entire environment.
Keep in mind the following notes when creating and working with replication sets and connections.
l Limitations
l Replication set rules are limited in length meaning that the entire volume\directory\filename

including slashes, spaces, periods, extensions, cannot exceed 259 characters.

l Double-Take can mirror, replicate, verify, and restore paths up to 4094 characters. Paths

longer than 4094 characters will be skipped and logged to the Double-Take log file and the
Linux system log.
l Do not name replication sets or select a target location using illegal characters. Illegal

characters include the following.

l period .

l question mark ?

l forward or backward angle bracket < >

l colon :

l quotation mark "

l forward or backward slash \ /

l asterisk *

l pipe or vertical bar |

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 148

 l Error checking and avoidance
l Do not connect more than one replication set to the same location on a target. You could

overwrite or corrupt your data.

l Replication sets contain error checking to avoid inadvertent overwrites of the replication set

rules. When replication sets are modified, a generation number is associated with the
modifications. The generation number is incremented anytime the modifications are saved,
but the save is not allowed if there is a mismatch between the generation number on the
source and the Replication Console. You will be notified that the replication set could not be
saved. This error checking safeguards the replication set data in the event that more than
one client machine is accessing the sources replication sets.
l Double-Take will not replicate the same data from two different replication sets on your

source. The data will only be replicated from one of the replication sets. If you need to
replicate the same data more than once, connect the same replication set to multiple
targets.
l If you rename the root folder of a connected replication set, Double-Take interprets this

operation as a move from inside the replication set to outside the replication set. Therefore,
since all of the files under that directory have been moved outside the replication set and
are no longer a part of the replication set, those files will be deleted from the target copy of
the replication set. This, in essence, will delete all of your replicated data from the target. If
you have to rename the root directory of your replication set, make sure that the replication
set is not connected.
l When creating replication sets, keep in mind that when recursive rules have the same type

(include or exclude) and have the same root path, the top level recursive rule will take
precedence over lower level non-recursive rules. For example, if you have /var/data
included recursively and /var/data/old included nonrecursively, the top level rule, /var/data/,
will take precedence and the rule /var/data/old will be discarded. If the rules are different
types (for example, /var/data is included and /var/data/old is excluded), both rules will be
applied as specified.
l Virus protection
l Virus protection software on the target should not scan replicated data. If the data is

protected on the source, operations that clean, delete, or quarantine infected files will be
replicated to the target by Double-Take. If the replicated data on the target must be
scanned for viruses, configure the virus protection software on both the source and target
to delete or quarantine infected files to a different directory that is not in the replication set. If
the virus software denies access to the file because it is infected, Double-Take will
continually attempt to commit operations to that file until it is successful, and will not commit
any other data until it can write to that file.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 149

Creating a replication set
Before you can establish a connection, you must create a replication set.
1. Highlight a source in the left pane of the Replication Console and select Insert, Replication Set
from the menu bar. You can also right-click on the source name and select New, Replication
Set.
2. A replication set icon appears in the left pane under the source. By default, it is named New
Replication Set. Rename the newly inserted replication set with a unique name by typing over the
default name and pressing Enter. This process is similar to naming a new folder in Windows
Explorer.
3. Expand the tree under the replication set name to view the volume and directory tree for the
source.

The default number of files that are listed in the right pane of the Replication Console is
2500, but this is user configurable. A larger number of file listings allows you to see more
files in the Replication Console, but results in a slower display rate. A smaller number of
file listings displays faster, but may not show all files contained in the directory. To change
the number of files displayed, select File, Options and adjust the File Listings slider bar
to the desired number.

To hide offline files, such as those generated by snapshot applications, select File,
Options and disable Display Offline Files. Offline files and folders are denoted by the
arrow over the lower left corner of the folder or file icon.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 150

 4. Identify the data on the source that you want to protect by selecting volumes, drives, directories,
and/or specific files.

Be sure and verify what files can be included by reviewing the Replication capabilities on
page 146.

Replication sets should only include necessary data. Including data such as temporary
files, logs, and/or locks will add unnecessary overhead and network traffic. For example, if
you are using Samba, make sure that the location of the lock file (lock dir in samba.conf) is
not a location in your Double-Take Availability replication set.

5. After selecting the data for this replication set, right-click the new replication set icon and select
Save. A saved replication set icon will change from red to black.
6. If you need to select a block device for replication, right-click the replication set and select Add
Device.
7. The block devices configured for Double-Take Availability replication are shown by default.
Highlight the device to include in the replication set and click OK.

If the device you want to include is not displayed, you can click Show Other Devices to
view all devices which are eligible for Double-Take Availability replication. You can select

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 151

 any of these devices, but you cannot use them for Double-Take Availability replication
until they are configured for Double-Take Availability replication. The status no dtloop
indicates the device is not configured for Double-Take Availability replication.

Make sure your target has a partitioned device with sufficient space. It should be equal to
or greater than the storage of the source device.
The partition size displayed may not match the output of the Linux df command. This is
because df shows the size of the mounted file system not the underlying partition which
may be larger. Additionally, Double-Take Availability uses powers of 1024 when
computing GB, MB, and so on. The df command typically uses powers of 1000 and
rounds up to the nearest whole value.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for any additional devices.

9. Right-click the updated replication set icon and select Save.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 152

Creating or modifying replication rules manually
There may be times when you cannot browse for data when creating a replication set. For example, you
can create a replication set rule for a directory or file that does not exist. Since you cannot browse for the
location, you have to create replication set rule manually. At other times, the data you want to replicate
cannot be easily selected from the Replication Console. For example, you may want to select all .db files
from a specific volume or directory. This task may be easier to complete by creating the replication set
rule manually. Use the following instructions to create or modify a replication set rule manually.
1. If you do not have a replication set created, you need to create one. Highlight a source in the left
pane of the Replication Console and select Insert, Replication Set from the menu bar. You can
also right-click on the source name and select New, Replication Set. A replication set icon
appears in the left pane under the source. By default, it is named New Replication Set. Rename
the newly inserted replication set with a unique name by typing over the default name and
pressing Enter. This process is similar to naming a new folder in Windows Explorer.
2. Right-click on the replication set icon and select Properties. The Replication Set Properties
dialog box appears and lists any existing rules. The existing rules may have been entered
manually or selected by browsing the source. Each rule will display the attributes associated it.

l IncInclude indicates that the specified path is to be included in the files sent to the target
l ExcExclude indicates that the specified path is not to be included in the files
sent to the target

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 153

 l RecRecursion indicates the rule should automatically be applied to the subdirectories of
the specified path. If you do not select this option, the rule will not be applied to
subdirectories.
3. From the Replication Set Properties dialog box, click Add.
4. Specify a path, wild card, or specific file name. Select the Include, Exclude, and/or Recurse
sub-directories attributes to be applied to this rule and click OK.
5. If you need to select block devices for replication, click Add Device. The block devices configured
for Double-Take replication are shown by default. Highlight the device to include in the replication
set and click OK. If the device you want to include is not displayed, you can click Show Other
Devices to view all devices which are eligible for Double-Take replication. You can select any of
these devices, but you cannot use them for Double-Take replication until they are configured for
Double-Take replication. The status no dtloop indicates the device is not configured for Double-
Take replication.
6. If you need to edit an existing rule, highlight it and click Edit.
7. If you need to remove a rule, highlight it and click Remove.
8. After the replication set rules have been defined, exit the Replication Set Properties dialog box by
clicking OK. Notice the replication set icon has changed from black to red, indicating changes to
the replication set rules. If you click Cancel, your changes will not be reflected in the current
replication set.
9. Right-click the replication set icon and select Save. A saved replication set icon will change from
red to black.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 154

Selecting a block device for replication
Double-Take allows you to select block devices for replication.
1. In the left pane, right-click the replication set that should include the block device and select Add
Device.
2. The block devices configured for Double-Take replication are shown by default. Highlight the
device to include in the replication set and click OK.

If the device you want to include is not displayed, you can click Show Other Devices to
view all devices which are eligible for Double-Take replication. You can select any of
these devices, but you cannot use them for Double-Take replication until they are
configured for Double-Take replication. The status no dtloop indicates the device is not
configured for Double-Take replication.

Make sure your target has a partitioned device with sufficient space. It should be equal to
or greater than the storage of the source device.
The partition size displayed may not match the output of the Linux df command. This is
because df shows the size of the mounted file system not the underlying partition which
may be larger. Additionally, Double-Take uses powers of 1024 when computing GB, MB,
and so on. The df command typically uses powers of 1000 and rounds up to the nearest
whole value.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for any additional devices.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 155

Modifying a replication set
Double-Take allows you to make modifications to a replication set when you want to change the data
you wish to protect. This allows you to add, remove, or modify any replication set rules without having to
create a new replication set.
1. In the left pane, highlight the replication set you want to modify and expand the volume and
directory levels as needed.
2. Modify the items by marking or clearing the volume, drive, directory, or file check boxes. Notice the
replication set icon has changed from black to red, indicating changes to the replication set rules.
3. After updating the rules for this replication set, right-click the replication set icon and select Save.
A saved replication set icon will change from red to black.

If you save changes to a connected replication set, it is recommended that you perform a
mirror to guarantee data integrity between the source and target machines. A dialog box
will appear instructing you to disconnect and reconnect the replication set and perform a
difference mirror.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 156

Renaming and copying a replication set
To rename or copy a replication set, click once on a highlighted replication set name to edit the field.
Specify a unique name and press Enter. The process is similar to renaming a folder in Windows
Explorer. If the original replication set has not been saved (red icon), the new name replaces the original
name. If the original replication set is saved (black icon), the new name creates a copy of the original
replication set.

If you save changes to a connected replication set, it is recommended that you perform a mirror
to guarantee data integrity between the source and target machines. A dialog box will appear
instructing you to disconnect and reconnect the replication set and perform a difference mirror.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 157

Calculating replication set size
While Double-Take is mirroring, the right pane of the Replication Console displays statistics to keep you
informed of its progress. If the size of the replication set is determined before the mirror is started,
Double-Take can display the percentage of the replication set that has been mirrored in the Mirror
Status column. If the size was not calculated prior to starting the mirror, the column displays Mirroring.
1. Right-click on the replication set icon and select Properties. The Replication Set Properties
dialog box appears.
2. Select the Size tab.

3. If the replication set size has never been determined, click Calculate. If the replication set has
previously been determined, the button will be labeled Recalculate. Depending on user activity,
the size shown may not accurately reflect the current size of the replication set. If changes are
occurring to files in the replication set while the calculation is being made, the actual size may
differ slightly. The amount of data is determined at the exact time the calculation is made.
4. Click OK to return to the Replication Console.

You can also configure the replication set calculation when establishing a connection
through the Connection Manager by selecting Calculate Replication Set size on
connection on the Mirroring tab.

If your replication set contains a large number of files, for example, ten thousand or more,
you may want to disable the calculation of the replication set size so that data will start

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 158

 being mirrored sooner. If calculation is enabled, the source calculates the file size before it
starts mirroring. This can take a significant amount of time depending on the number of
files and system performance. Disabling calculation will result in the mirror status not
showing the percentage complete or the number of bytes remaining to be mirrored.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 159

Exporting and importing a replication set
To help reuse replication sets between servers, you can export an existing replication set on one server
and import it on another.
l Exporting a replication setRight-click an existing replication set and select Export. Select a
location and file name for the replication set information, and click Save. If you want to share the
replication set information with other consoles, select a location accessible by other consoles.
l Importing a replication setRight-click the server where you want to import the replication set
and select New, Import Replication Set. Locate the replication set information file and click
Open. By default, the new replication set will have the same name as the original replication set. If
desired, modify the name. Press Enter to accept the replication set name. By default, the new
replication set is imported in an unsaved state. An unsaved replication set icon is red. Modify the
replication set definition (include or exclude volumes or files) and then save the replication set by
right-clicking on it and selecting Save. A saved replication set icon is black.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 160

Deleting a replication set
You can only delete a replication set if it is not currently connected. If the replication set is connected, you
must disconnect the connection and then delete the replication set.
To delete a replication set, right-click the replication set icon and select Delete. Additionally, you can
highlight the replication set and press the Delete key on the keyboard.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 161

Starting replication
Starting replication when establishing a connection is the default and recommended configuration. If
replication is not started, data is not added to the queue on the source, and source/target data integrity is
not guaranteed.
To start replication, right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select
Replication, Start. After starting replication, you should perform a remirror to guarantee the source and
target data are identical.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 162

Inserting tasks during replication
Task command processing is a Double-Take feature that allows you to insert and run tasks at various
points during the replication of data. Because the tasks are user-defined, you can achieve a wide variety
of goals with this feature. For example, you might insert a task to create a snapshot or run a backup on
the target after a certain segment of data from the source has been applied on the target. This allows
you to coordinate a point-in-time backup with real-time replication.
Task command processing can be enabled from the Replication Console, but it can only be initiated
through the scripting language. See the Scripting Guide for more information.
To enable task command processing from the Replication Console, right-click a server in the left pane of
the Replication Console, select Properties, select the Setup tab, and select Enable Task Command
Processing.

If you disable this option on a source server, you can still submit tasks to be processed on a
target, although task command processing must be enabled on the target.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 163

Verification
Verification is the process of confirming that the data on the target is identical to the data on the source.
Verification creates a log file detailing what was verified as well as which files are not synchronized. If the
data is not the same, Double-Take can automatically initiate a remirror. The remirror ensures data
integrity between the source and target.
l Verifying manually on page 165You can verify your data at any time manually.
l Verifying on a schedule on page 166You can schedule verification tasks for periodic intervals.
l Configuring the verification log on page 168You can configure how the verification information
is logged.

Differences in files on the source and target should be expected for files and applications that
are in use during the verification process.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 164

Verifying manually
A manual verification can be run anytime a mirror is not in progress.
1. Right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select Verify.
2. Select the verification options that you would like to perform.

l Verify onlyThis option verifies the data and generates a verification log, but it does not
remirror any files that are different on the source and target.
l Remirror data to the target automaticallyThis option verifies the data, generates a
verification log, and remirrors to the target any files that are different on the source.
l Only if the sources date is newer than the targetsIf you are remirroring your files,
you can specify that only files that are newer on the source than the target be remirrored.

If you are using a database application, do not use the newer option unless you
know for certain you need it. With database applications, it is critical that all files, not
just some of them that might be newer, get mirrored.

l Use Checksum comparison to send minimal blocks of dataSpecify if you want the
verification process to use a block checksum comparison to determine which blocks are
different. If this option is enabled, only those blocks (not the entire files) that are different will
be identified in the log and/or remirrored to the target.

Database applications may update files without changing the date, time, or file size.
Therefore, if you are using database applications, you should use the block
checksum comparison to ensure proper verification and remirroring.

3. Click OK to start the verification.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 165

Verifying on a schedule
Verification can be scheduled to occur automatically at periodic intervals.
1. Right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select Connection
Manager.
2. Select the Verify tab.

3. Specify when you want to start the initial verification. Select the immediate date and time by
clicking Now, or enter a specific Date and Time. The down arrow next to Date displays a
calendar allowing easy selection of any date. Time is formatted for any AM or PM time.
4. Mark the Reverification Interval check box to repeat the verification process at the specified
interval. Specify an amount of time and choose minutes, hours, or days.
5. Select if you want to Remirror data to the target automatically. When enabled, Double-Take
will verify the data, generate a verification log, and remirror to the target any files that are different
on the source. If disabled, Double-Take will verify the data and generate a verification log, but no
files will be remirrored to the target.
6. If you are remirroring your files, you can specify Only send data if sources date is newer than
the targets date so that only files that are newer on the source than on the target are remirrored.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 166

 If you are using a database application, do not use the newer option unless you know for
certain you need it. With database applications, it is critical that all files, not just some of
them that might be newer, get mirrored.

7. Specify if you want the verification process to Use Checksum to send minimal blocks of data
to determine which blocks are different. If this option is enabled, only those blocks (not the entire
files) that are different will be identified in the log and/or remirrored to the target.

Database applications may update files without changing the date, time, or file size.
Therefore, if you are using database applications, you should use the block checksum
comparison to ensure proper verification and remirroring.

8. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 167

Configuring the verification log
A verification log is created on the source during the verification process. The log identifies what is
verified as well as which files are not synchronized.
1. Right-click the source server on the left pane of the Replication Console and select Properties.
2. Select the Logging tab.

3. At the top of the window, Folder identifies the location where the log files identified on this tab are
stored. By default, the log files are stored in the same directory as the Double-Take program files.
4. Under the Verification section, Filename contains the base log file name for the verification
process. The replication set name will be prepended to the base log file name. For example, since
the default is DTVerify.log, the verification log for the replication set called UserData would be
UserData DTVerify.log.
5. Specify the Maximum Length of the log file. The default is 1048576 bytes (1 MB). When the log
file reaches this limit, no additional data will be logged.
6. By default, the log is appended to itself each time a verification process is completed. Clear the

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 168

 Append check box if you do not want to append to the previous log file.

Changes made to the verification log in the Server Properties, Logging tab will apply to
all connections from the current source machine.

7. Specify the Language of the log file. Currently, English is the only available language.
8. Click OK to save the settings.
In the log file, each verification process is delineated by beginning and end markers. A list of files that are
different on the source and target is provided as well cumulative totals for the verification process. The
information provided for each file is the state of its synchronization between the source and the target at
the time the file is verified. If the remirror option is selected so that files that are different are remirrored,
the data in the verify log reflects the state of the file before it is remirrored, and does not report the state
of the file after it is remirrored. If a file is reported as different, review the output for the file to determine
what is different.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 169

Data transmission
Double-Take data is continuously transmitted to the target machine. Although the data may be queued if
the network or target machine is slow, the default transmission setting is to transmit the data as soon as
possible. You can modify the transmission to suit your environment.
l Stopping, starting, pausing, and resuming transmission on page 171You can maintain the
source/target connection, but still control the transmission of data across the network by using the
manual transmission controls. If transmission is paused, the data is queued on the source until
you manually restart the transmission.
l Scheduling data transmission on page 171You can set event driven or scheduling criteria to
determine when data is transmitted. Data is queued on the source until the event or schedule is
met. Also, transmission can be stopped by using these criteria. Scheduled transmission options
can be toggled on and off, allowing you to enable them only when you need to use them.
l Limiting transmission bandwidth on page 176You can specify bandwidth limitations to restrict
the amount of network bandwidth used for Double-Take data transmissions. Data is queued on
the source until bandwidth is available. Bandwidth limitations can be full-time or scheduled.
l Compressing data for transmission on page 178You can compress data to reduce the amount
of bandwidth needed to transmit Double-Take data.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 170

Stopping, starting, pausing, and resuming transmission
To start, pause, or resume the transmission of data from the source to the target, right-click an
established connection and select Transmit and the appropriate transmission control.

Scheduling data transmission

Using the Connection Manager Transmit tab, you can set start and stop criteria along with a schedule
window.

Double-Take checks the schedule once every second, and if a user-defined criteria is met,
transmission will start or stop, depending on the option specified.

Any replication sets from a source connected to the same IP address on a target will share the
same scheduled transmission configuration.

1. Right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select Connection
Manager.
2. Select the Transmit tab. The Transmit tab contains four limit types: Bandwidth, Start, Stop,
and Window. The transmission options for each limit type are displayed by highlighting a
selection in the Limit Type box.
At the top of the Transmit tab dialog box, the Enable Transmission Limiting check box allows
you to turn the transmission options on or off. You can enable the transmission options by marking
the Enable Transmission Limiting check box when you want the options to be applied, but you
can disable the transmission options, without losing the settings, by clearing that check box.
Also at the top of the Transmit tab dialog box, the Clear All button, when selected, will remove all
transmission limitations that have been set under any of the limit types. The Clear button will clear
the settings only for the Limit Type selected.
3. When you schedule transmission start criteria, transmission will start when the criteria is met and
will continue until the queue is empty or a transmission stop criteria is met. Select the Start
option in the Limit Type box.
Define the start options for Double-Take transmission by using any combination of the following
options.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 171

 l Transmission session startThis option establishes a date and time of the day to begin
transmitting data. For example, you may want to specify a transmission time that
corresponds to a low bandwidth usage time. Once started, Double-Take will continue to
transmit data until the queue is empty or until another limitation stops the transmission.
Specify a Date and Time to start transmitting data. The down arrow next to the date field
displays a calendar allowing easy selection of any date. The time field is formatted for any
AM or PM time.
l Session IntervalThis option begins transmitting Double-Take data at specified intervals
of time. This option is used in conjunction with Transmission session start. For example,
if the Session Interval is set to repeat transmission every 30 minutes and the
Transmission session start is set to begin transmitting at 10 p.m., if the queue is emptied
at 10:20 the transmission will stop. The start criteria is again met at 10:30 and Double-Take
will begin transmitting any new data in the queue. Specify an interval for additional
transmissions by indicating a length of time and choosing minutes, hours, or days.
l Queue Threshold (percentage) and Queue threshold (bytes)If the allocated
amount of queue disk space is in use, Double-Take cannot continue to queue data causing
an auto-disconnect and the potential for loss of data. To avoid using the entire queue, you
can configure Double-Take to begin transmitting data to the target when the queue reaches
a certain point. This point can be defined as a percentage of the disk queue that must be in
use or the number of bytes in the disk queue. For example, if you specify 40%, when 40% of
the queue is in use, Double-Take initiates the transmission process and sends the data in
the queue to the target machine. The transmission stops when the queue is empty or a
Double-Take stop transmission criteria is met. Or you might set a queue threshold of 500

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 172

 MB. Double-Take will wait until there is 500 MB of data in the queue and then begin
transmitting the data. Like other start criteria, Double-Take continues transmitting until the
queue is empty or a Double-Take stop criteria is met. Specify a percentage of the disk
queue and system memory that must be in use to initiate the transmission process, and/or
specify the number of bytes that must be in the source queue and system memory to initiate
the transmission process.

A Transmission Session Start setting will override any other start criteria. For
example, if you set the Transmission Session Start and the Queue Threshold,
transmission will not start until you reach the indicated start time.

4. Schedule any desired stop criteria to stop transmission after a transmission start criteria has
initiated the transmission. If you do not establish a stop criteria, transmission will end when the
queue is empty. Select the Stop option in the Limit Type box.
Define the stop options to stop Double-Take transmissions by using either or both of the following
options.

l Time LimitThe time limit specifies the maximum length of time for each transmission
period. Any data that is not sent during the specified time limit remains on the source queue.
When used in conjunction with the session interval start option, you can explicitly define
how often data is transmitted and how long each transmission lasts. Specify the maximum
length of time that Double-Take can continue transmitting by indicating a length of time and

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 173

 choosing minutes, hours, or days.
l Byte LimitThe byte limit specifies the maximum number of bytes that can be sent before
ending the transmission session. When the byte limit is met, Double-Take will automatically
stop transmitting data to the target. Any data that still remains waits in the source queue
until the transmission is restarted. When used in conjunction with a session start option, you
can explicitly define how much data is being sent at a given time. Specify the maximum
number of bytes that can be sent before ending the Double-Take transmission.

The transmission start and stop criteria should be used in conjunction with each
other. For example, if you set the Queue Threshold equal to 10 MB and the Byte
Limit equal to 10 MB, a network connection will be established when there is 10
MB of data in the queue. The data will be transmitted and when the 10 MB Byte
Limit is reached, the network connection closes. This is useful in configurations
where metered charges are based on connection time.

5. Schedule a transmission window to establish a period of availability for all Double-Take

transmissions. You can specify a begin and end time for all Double-Take transmissions. When a
transmission window is in effect, all other start and stop criteria are bound by this window. This
means that Double-Take will never transmit data outside of an established window, regardless of
other transmission settings. For example, if you set a window of availability from 9 p.m. to 4 a.m.
and a start option to initiate transmission at 5 a.m., the window option will override the start option
and no data will be sent at 5 a.m. Select the Window option in the Limit Type box.

Setting a transmission window by itself is not sufficient to start a transmission. You still
need to set a start criteria within the window.

Define a window to control Double-Take transmissions by enabling the feature and then
specifying both window options.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 174

 l Enable Transmission WindowThis option specifies whether a transmission window is
in use.
l Open window timeSpecifies the time, formatted for AM or PM, when the transmission

window will open, allowing transmission to begin.

l Close window timeSpecifies the time, formatted for AM or PM, when the transmission

window will close, stopping all transmission.

6. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 175

Limiting transmission bandwidth
Using the Connection Manager Transmit tab, you can set start and stop criteria along with a schedule
window.

Double-Take checks the schedule once every second, and if a user-defined criteria is met,
transmission will start or stop, depending on the option specified.

Any replication sets from a source connected to the same IP address on a target will share the
same scheduled transmission configuration.

1. Right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select Connection
Manager.
2. Select the Transmit tab. The Transmit tab contains four limit types: Bandwidth, Start, Stop,
and Window. The transmission options for each limit type are displayed by highlighting a
selection in the Limit Type box.
At the top of the Transmit tab dialog box, the Enable Transmission Limiting check box allows
you to turn the transmission options on or off. You can enable the transmission options by marking
the Enable Transmission Limiting check box when you want the options to be applied, but you
can disable the transmission options, without losing the settings, by clearing that check box.
Also at the top of the Transmit tab dialog box, the Clear All button, when selected, will remove all
transmission limitations that have been set under any of the limit types. The Clear button will clear
the settings only for the Limit Type selected.
3. Select the Bandwidth option in the Limit Type box. Mark the Limit Bandwidth check box to
enable the bandwidth limiting features. Define the bandwidth available for Double-Take
transmission by using either of the following options.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 176

 l PercentageSpecify the percentage of bandwidth to be used for Double-Take
transmissions and the total bandwidth capacity that is available.
l Transfer RateSpecify the number of kilobits to send every second.

The only value that is persistently stored is the number of kilobits per second. When
the page is refreshed, the percentage and available bandwidth capacity may not be
the same value that you entered. Double-Take changes these values to the
maximum values for the smallest possible link.

4. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 177

Compressing data for transmission
To help reduce the amount of bandwidth needed to transmit Double-Take data, compression allows you
to compress data prior to transmitting it across the network. In a WAN environment this provides optimal
use of your network resources. If compression is enabled, the data is compressed before it is transmitted
from the source. When the target receives the compressed data, it decompresses it and then writes it to
disk. On a default Double-Take installation, compression is disabled.

Any replication sets from a source connected to the same IP address on a target will share the
same compression configuration.

Keep in mind that the process of compressing data impacts processor usage on the source. If you notice
an impact on performance while compression is enabled in your environment, either adjust to a lower
level of compression, or leave compression disabled. Use the following guidelines to determine whether
you should enable compression:
l If data is being queued on the source at any time, consider enabling compression.
l If the server CPU utilization is averaging over 85%, be cautious about enabling compression.
l The higher the level of compression, the higher the CPU utilization will be.
l Do not enable compression if most of the data is inherently compressed. Many image (.jpg, .gif)
and media (.wmv, .mp3, .mpg) files, for example, are already compressed. Some images files,
such as .bmp and .tif, are uncompressed, so enabling compression would be beneficial for those
types.
l Compression may improve performance even in high-bandwidth environments.
l Do not enable compression in conjunction with a WAN Accelerator. Use one or the other to
compress Double-Take data.
Use the following instructions for setting compression.
1. Right-click the connection on the right pane of the Replication Console and select Connection
Manager.
2. Select the Compression tab.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 178

 3. By default, compression is disabled. To enable it, select Enable Compression.
4. Depending on the compression algorithms available for your operating system, you may see a
slider bar indicating different compression levels. Set the level from minimum to maximum
compression to suit your needs.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 179

Failover
Failover is the process in which a target stands in for a failed source. As a result, user and application
requests that are directed to the failed source are routed to the target.
Double-Take monitors the source status by tracking network requests and responses exchanged
between the source and target. When a monitored source misses a user-defined number of requests,
Double-Take assumes that the machine has failed. Double-Take then prompts the network
administrator to initiate failover, or, if configured, it occurs automatically.
The failover target assumes the network identity of the failed source. When the target assumes the
identity of the source, user and application requests destined for the source machine or its IP address
(es) are routed to the target.
When partnered with the Double-Take data replication capabilities, failover routes user and application
requests with minimal disruption and little or no data loss. In some cases, failover may be used without
data replication to ensure high availability on a machine that only provides processing services, such as
a web server.
Failover can be configured to stand in for one or more IP addresses associated with different NICs on
the source. Each IP address can be added to a specific target NIC making NIC configuration very
flexible. For example, a single NIC on the source may have one or more IP addresses assigned to it. If
that source or the NIC fails, all traffic from the source is directed to the target. If there are multiple NICs
on the source, the target can assume the traffic from all of the addresses. Additional NICs on the target
increase flexibility and control. Secondary target NICs can assume the traffic from a failed source NIC
while normal target traffic can continue to use the primary target NIC.
Failback is the process in which the target releases the source identity so that the source can be brought
back onto the network.
l Configuring failover monitoring on page 181
l Editing failover monitoring configuration on page 188
l Monitoring failover monitoring on page 189
l Failing over on page 192
l Removing failover monitoring configuration on page 192

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 180

Configuring failover monitoring
Before beginning your failover configuration, review your IP address and subnet configuration on the
source. Because of limitations in the way the Linux kernel handles IP address aliases, you will not be
able to mix subnets on the eth0 network interface. Failover should not cause problems in this
configuration, but you will lose IP addresses during failback. Therefore, if you must mix subnets on a
single interface, use eth1 or higher.
1. The Failover Control Center can be started from within the Replication Console or from the
Windows desktop.
l From the Replication Console, select Tools, Failover Control Center.

l From the Windows desktop, select Start, Programs, Double-Take for Linux,

Availability, Double-Take Failover Control Center.

2. Select a failover target from the Target Machine list box.

If the target you need is not listed, click Add Target and manually enter a name or IP
address (with or without a port number). You can also select the Browse button to search
for a target machine name. Click OK to select the target machine and return to the
Failover Control Center main window.

3. Click Login to login to the selected target.

4. Select a source machine to monitor by clicking Add Monitor. The Insert Source Machine dialog
box appears in front of the Monitor Settings dialog box.
5. On the Insert Source Machine dialog, specify your source machine by either of the following
methods.

l Type the name of the machine that you want to monitor in Machine Name(s) and click OK.
l Click Custom. Enter the name of the server and click Add. Specify the IP address and

subnet mask of the specified server and click OK. Click OK again.
The Insert Source Machine dialog closes and the Monitor Settings dialog remains open with your
source listed in the Names to Monitor tree.
6. In the Names to Monitor tree, locate and select the IP addresses on the source that you want to
monitor.
7. Highlight an IP address that you have selected for monitoring and select a Target Adapter that

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 181

 will assume that IP address during failover. Repeat this process for each IP address that is being
monitored.

Current IP Addresses displays the IP address(es) currently assigned to the selected

target adapter.

8. Highlight an IP address that you have selected for monitoring and select a Monitor Interval. This
setting identifies the number of seconds between the monitor requests sent from the target to the
source to determine if the source is online. Repeat this step for each IP address that is being
monitored.
9. Highlight an IP address that you have selected for monitoring and select the Missed Packets.
This setting is the number of monitor replies sent from the source to the target that can be missed
before assuming the source machine has failed. Repeat this step for each IP address that is being
monitored.

To achieve shorter delays before failover, use lower Monitor Interval and Missed
Packets values. This may be necessary for IP addresses on machines, such as a web
server or order processing database, which must remain available and responsive at all
times. Lower values should be used where redundant interfaces and high-speed, reliable
network links are available to prevent the false detection of failure. If the hardware does
not support reliable communications, lower values can lead to premature failover. To
achieve longer delays before failover, choose higher values. This may be necessary for IP
addresses on slower networks or on a server that is not transaction critical. For example,
failover would not be necessary in the case of a server restart.

10. Highlight the source name and specify the Items to Failover, which identifies which source
components you want to failover to the target.
l IP AddressesIf you want to failover the IP addresses on the source, enable this option

and then specify the addresses that you want to failover. When the source and target are

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 182

 on the same subnet, generally a LAN environment, you should failover the IPaddress. If
the source and target are on different subnets, generally a WANenvironment, you should
not failover the IPaddress. See WAN considerations on page 184 for options on handling
WANfailover.
l Monitored onlyOnly the IP address(es) that are selected for monitoring will be

failed over.
l Include UnmonitoredAll of the IP address(es) will be failed over.

If you are monitoring multiple IP addresses, IP address conflicts may occur

during failover when the number of IP addresses that trigger failover is less
than the number of IP addresses that are assumed by the target during
failover. For example, if a source has four IP addresses (three public and one
private), and two of the three public addresses are monitored, but all three
public addresses are configured to failover, a conflict could occur. If the
source fails, there is no conflict because all of the IP addresses have failed
and no longer exist. But if the failure only occurs on one of the monitored
addresses, the other two IP addresses are still affected. If all of the
addresses are failed over, these addresses then exist on both the source and
the target. Therefore, when a source machine has fewer IP addresses that
trigger failover than IP addresses that will be failed over, there is a risk of an
IP address conflict.

11. By default, Manual Intervention is enabled, allowing you to control when failover occurs. When
a failure occurs, a prompt appears in the Failover Control Center and waits for you to manually
initiate the failover process. Disable this option only if you want failover to occur immediately when
a failure occurs.
12. If you are using any failover or failback scripts, click Scripts and enter the path and filename for
each script type. Scripts may contain any valid Linux command, executable, or script file.
Examples of functions specified in scripts include stopping daemons on the target before failover
because they may not be necessary while the target is standing in for the source, stopping
daemons on the target that need to be restarted with the sources machine name and IP address,
starting daemons or loading applications that are in an idle, standby mode waiting for failover to
occur, notifying the administrator before and after failover or failback occurs, stopping daemons
on the target after failback because they are no longer needed, stopping daemons on the target
that need to be restarted with the target machines original name and IP address, and so
on.Specify each script that you want to run and the following options, if necessary.
13. If you want to delay the failover or failback processes until the associated script has completed,
mark the appropriate check box.
14. If you want the same scripts to be used as the default for future monitor sessions, mark the
appropriate check box.
15. Click OK to return to the Monitor Settings dialog box.
16. Click OK on the Monitor Settings dialog box to save your monitor settings and begin monitoring for
a failure.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 183

WAN considerations
When the source and target are on the same subnet, generally a LAN environment, you should failover
the IPaddress. However, if the source and target are on different subnets, generally a
WANenvironment, you should not failover the IPaddress. You have several options for handling
WANfailover.
l DNSupdatesYou can script DNSupdates to modify, at failover time, the source server's
DNSA records to have the IP address of the target. When clients resolve a name to an IP
address, they will resolve to the target IP address. Depending on the domain size and how
DNSupdates are propagated, it may take several minutes or even hours for the updates to
complete.
l Reconfigure routers using a failover scriptYou can automatically reconfigure routers
using a failover script to move the source's subnet from the source's physical network to the
target's physical network. Since the route to the source's subnet will be changed at failover, the
source server must be the only system on that subnet, which in turn requires all server
communications to pass through a router. Additionally, it may take several minutes or even hours
for routing tables on other routers throughout the network to converge.
l VPN infrastructureA VPN infrastructure allows your source and target to be on the same
subnet, in which case IP address failover will work the same as a LAN configuration.
Scripting example using the BINDDNSclient
1. Install the BIND DNSclient on the target server, if it is not already installed.
2. Create a PATH statement on the target for the BIND directory to ensure that it runs every time the
executable is called.
3. Update the Double-Take daemon on the target to use a domain account that has rights to modify
BINDDNS. You will have to stop and restart the daemon for changes to the user account to take
effect.
4. Create a failover script with the following command. Specify this script for post-failover.

nsupdate "dnsover"

5. Create a file called dnsover and add the following lines. This is the file called by your post-failover
script.

# Substitute your source name, target name, and target IP address

update delete source_server_name.fully_qualified_domain.com

update add target_server_name.fully_qualified_domain.com 86400 A target_server_IP
send

6. Create a failback script with the following command. Specify this script for post-failback.

nsupdate "dnsback"

7. Create a file called dnsback and add the following lines. This is the file called by your post-failback
script.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 184

 # Substitute your target name, source name, and source IP address
update delete target_server_name.fully_qualified_domain.com A
update add source_server_name.fully_qualified_domain.com 86400 A source_server_IP
send

When failover and failback occur, the failover and failback scripts will automatically trigger DNSupdates.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 185

Protecting NFS exports
NFS exports must be configured for failover through the failover scripts or created manually on the
target after failover.
1. Start the Double-Take daemon on the source.
2. Stop and restart the NFS daemon on the source. The Double-Take daemon must be running
before the NFSdaemon in order for replication operations to be captured.
3. On your target, set the NFS daemon to manual startup. This allows the failover script to control
when the daemon starts on the target.
4. Create a replication set on the source that includes /etc/exports and the shared data.
5. Connect the replication set using the Connection Wizard or the Connection Manager.
6. Add the following to your post-failover script.

service nfs start

7. If necessary, update DNS.

After failover, the NFS daemon will automatically be started by the post-failover script. If your clients see
a stale file handle error message when attempting to access an export, they will need to reconnect to it.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 186

Protecting Samba shares
A share is any local volume, drive, or directory resource that is exported and shared across a network.
Sambashares must be configured for failover through the failover scripts or created manually on the
target.
1. Start the Double-Take daemon on the source.
2. Stop and restart the Samba daemon on the source. The Double-Take daemon must be running
before the Sambadaemon in order for replication operations to be captured.
3. On your target, set the SMB and WinBind daemons to manual startup. This allows the failover
script to control when the daemons start on the target.
4. Create a replication set on the source that includes /etc/SAMBA/samba_conf and the shared
data.
5. Connect the replication set using the Connection Wizard or the Connection Manager.
6. Add the following to your post-failover script.

service smb start

7. If necessary, update DNS.

After failover, the daemons will automatically be started by the post-failover script. If your clients see an
access denied or share not found error message when attempting to access a share, they will need to
remount the share.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 187

Editing failover monitoring configuration
If you want to edit the monitor settings for a source that is currently being monitored, highlight that source
on the Monitored Machines tree on the main Failover Control Center screen and click Edit. The Monitor
Settings dialog box will open. See Configuring failover monitoring on page 181.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 188

Monitoring failover monitoring
Since it can be essential to quickly know the status of failover monitoring, Double-Take offers various
methods for monitoring failover monitoring. When the Failover Control Center is running, you will see
four visual indicators:
l The Failover Control Center Time to Fail counter
l The Failover Control Center status bar located at the bottom of the window
l The Failover Control Center colored bullets to the left of each IP address and source machine
l The Windows desktop icon tray containing a failover icon

You can minimize the Failover Control Center and, although it will not appear in your Windows
taskbar, it will still be active and the failover icon will still appear in the desktop icon tray.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 189

 The Failover Control Center does not have to be running for failover to occur.

The following table identifies how the visual indicators change when the source is online.

Time to Fail Countdown

The Time to Fail counter is counting down and resetting each time a response is
received from the source machine.
Status Bar
The status bar indicates that the target machine is monitoring the source machine.
Colored Bullets
The bullets are green.
When the Time to Fail value has decreased by 25% of the entire timeout period, the
bullet changes from green to yellow, indicating that the target has not received a
response from the source. The yellow bullet is a caution signal. If a response from the
source is received, the countdown resets and the bullets change back to green. If the
countdown reaches zero without the target receiving a response from the source,
failover begins.
Desktop Icon Tray
The Windows desktop icon tray contains a failover icon with red and green computers.

The following table identifies how the visual indicators change when the source fails and failover is
initiated.

Time to Fail Countdown

The Time to Fail countdown value is 0.
Status Bar
The status bar displays the source machine and IP address currently being assumed
by the target.
Colored Bullets
The bullets are red.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 190

Desktop Icon Tray
The Windows desktop icon tray contains a failover icon with red and green computers.

The following table identifies how the visual indicators change when failover is complete.

Time to Fail Countdown

The Time to Fail counter is replaced with a failed message.
Status Bar
The status bar indicates that monitoring has continued.
Colored Bullets
The bullets are red.
Desktop Icon Tray
The Windows desktop icon tray contains a failover icon with a red computer.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 191

Failing over
The failover process, including script processing, can be tested at any time. To force unavailability,
disconnect the network cable from a monitored machine, wait for the Time to Fail counter to decrease
to zero and failover begins. To avoid the countdown delay, highlight the monitored machine name in the
Failover Control Center window and select Failover.
If Manual Intervention is enabled, the Failover Control Center will prompt you when a failure occurs.

If the Failover Control Center is not running at the time the failure occurs, the manual
intervention dialog box will appear the next time the Failover Control Center is started.

When a failure occurs, an alert is forwarded to the Linux system log. You can then start the
Failover Control Center and respond to the manual intervention prompt.
If SNMP is installed and configured, an SNMP trap is also generated. When using a third-party
SNMP manager, an e-mail or page can be generated to notify you of the failure.
Files that were open or being accessed at the time of failover will generate Stale NFS file handle
error messages. Remount the NFS export to correct this error.

Click Cancel to abort the failover process. If necessary, you can initiate failover later from the Failover
Control Center. Click OK to proceed with failover.

Removing failover monitoring configuration

If you want to discontinue monitoring a source, highlight that machine on the Monitored Machines tree
on the main Failover Control Center screen and click Remove Monitor. No additional dialog boxes will
open.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 192

Failback and restoration
Failover occurred because the target was monitoring the source for a failure, and when a failure
occurred, the target stood in for the source. User and application requests that were directed to the
failed source are routed to the target.
While the users are accessing their data on the target, you can repair the issue(s) on the source. Before
users can access the source again, you will need to restore the data from the target back to the source
and perform failback. Failback is the process where the target releases the source identity it assumed
during failover. Once failback is complete, user and application requests are no longer routed to the
target, but back to the source.
Ideally, you want to restore your data from the target back to the source before you failback. This allows
users who are currently accessing their data on the target because of failover to continue accessing their
data. Restoration before failback reduces user downtime. The other method allows you to failback first
and then restore the data from the target to the source. This method may be easier in some situations,
but users may experience longer downtime, depending on the amount of data to be restored, because
they will be unable to access their data during both the restoration and the failback processes.
l Restoring then failing back on page 194
l Failing back then restoring on page 199

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 193

Restoring then failing back
Use these instructions to restore your data first and then failback.
1. Resolve the problem(s) on the source that caused it to fail. If you have to rebuild your source, use
a unique identity.
2. Stop any applications that were failed over that may be running on your source. The files must be
closed on the source so that updated files from the target will successfully overwrite the files on
the source during the restoration.
3. Complete the following steps on your source to prevent Double-Take from automatically
reconnecting any connections.
a. Stop Double-Take.
b. Rrename /vra/lib/DT/connect.sts to a unique file name.
c. Start Double-Take.
4. Modify the source so that it can be brought onto the network with a new, unique IPaddress or one
that was not failed over. It needs to be able to exist on the network without an IP address conflict
and communicate with the target.
5. At this point, confirm you have the following configuration.
l Your target is standing in for your source because of failover, and users are accessing their

data from the target.

l Your source is back online with a unique IP address.

l The source and target can communicate with each other.

l All applications on the source are stopped.

6. From your target, confirm the Replication Console is communicating with the source using the
new, unique IP address.
a. From the Replication Console on the target, right-click the source and select Remove.
b. Depending on your configuration, the source may be automatically inserted back into the
Replication Console. If it is not, select Insert, Server. Specify the source server by the new
IPaddress and click OK.
7. Begin your restoration process.
a. From the Replication Console, select Tools, Restoration Wizard.
b. Review the Welcome screen and click Next to continue.

At any time while using the Restoration Wizard, click Back to return to previous
screens and review your selections.

c. Select the target that contains the current copy of the data that you want to restore and click
Next.
d. Select the original source or Alternate, if your original source is not listed. This option
identifies to the target which data set you are trying to restore so that the appropriate
replication sets can be presented to you.
e. Click Next to continue.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 194

 f. Specify if you want to use an existing replication set or create a new one. This replication
set will be used to connect from the target to the source.
l Use this replication setIf you choose to use an existing replication set, specify

the name of that replication set by selecting it from the pull-down menu. You will have
an opportunity to modify the replication set definition.
l Create a new replication set with this nameIf you choose to create a new

replication set, specify a replication set name.With this option, you will need to define
the data to be restored.
g. Click Next to continue.
h. A tree display appears identifying the data available for restoration. Mark the check box of
the volumes, directories, and/or files you want to restore. Keep in mind that if you exclude
volumes, folders, and/or files that were originally replicated, it may compromise the integrity
of your applications or data.
i. Click Next to continue
j. Select the new source server. This is the server where the data from the target will be
restored. This may be the original source server or a new server. Click Next to continue.
k. Select your network route to the new source, which includes the IP address and port
number. Also select the location on the new source for the restored data. If you want to set
a customized path, click in the field under Source Path to edit the location.

l. Click Next to continue.

m. Specify the restoration options that you want to use.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 195

 l Replicate data during the restoration connectionThis option allows you to
replicate on-going data changes during and after the restoration mirror is performed.
Use this option if the source data on the target will continue to change during the
restoration process. You do not need to use this option if the source data on the
target is not changing. If you do not select this option, any data changes that might
occur on the target after the restoration process is initiated will not be transmitted to
the source. If you do select this option, you must configure replication on the target
prior to initiating the restoration process.
l Restore replication set definition to new sourceThis option restores a copy of
the replication set database on the target to the new source.
l Overwrite existing data during restoreThis option restores all existing files by
overwriting them and writes any files that do not exist. If this option is disabled, only
files that do not exist on the new source will be restored.
l Only if backup copy's date is more recentThis option restores only
those files that are newer on the target than on the new source. The entire file
is overwritten with this option.

If you are using a database application, do not use the newer option
unless you know for certain you need it. With database applications, it
is critical that all files, not just some of them that might be newer, get
restored.

l Use Checksum comparison to send minimal blocks of dataSpecify if

you want the restoration process to use a block checksum comparison to
determine which blocks are different. If this option is enabled, only those
blocks (not the entire files) that are different will be restored to the new source.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 196

 To ensure data integrity, the replicate during restoration and overwrite
existing data options are dependent on each other. If you want to enable
replication, overwrite data will automatically be enabled. If you disable the
option to overwrite data, replication will automatically be disabled.

l Use alternate target files for executables that may be in useIf you have
executables that may be in use during the restoration, you can have Double-Take
create and update an alternate file during the restoration. Once the mirroring and
replication operations have been completed, the alternate file will be renamed to the
original file. This process will reduce the speed of your restoration, so it should only
be used if executables may be in use.
n. Review your selections and click Finish to begin the restoration.
8. Monitoring the restoration connection and after the Mirror Status is Idle, schedule a time for
failback. User downtime will begin once failback is started, so select a time that will have minimal
disruption on your users.
9. When you are ready, begin the failback process.
a. Stop user access to the target. The user downtime starts now.
b. In the Replication Console, watch the restoration connection until activity has ended and
replication is in a Ready state. This will happen as the final data in queue, if any, is applied
on the source. The replication Ready state indicates replication is waiting for new incoming
data changes.
c. Disconnect the restoration connection.
d. Open the Failover Control Center.
e. Select the original target that is currently standing in for the original failed source.
f. Highlight the failed source and click Failback. If you have a pre-failback script configured, it
will be started.
g. When failback is complete, the post-failback script, if configured, will be started. When the
script is complete, you will be prompted to determine if you want to continue failover
monitoring, do not select either option. Leave the prompt dialog box open as is.
10. Complete the following steps on your source to update the source to its original identity.
a. Stop Double-Take.
b. Modify the source identity back to the original source IP address.
c. Start Double-Take.
11. Confirm the Replication Console is communicating with the source using the original IP address.
a. Right-click the source and select Remove.
b. Depending on your configuration, the source may be automatically inserted back into the
Replication Console. If it is not, select Insert, Server. Specify the source server by the
original IPaddress and click OK.
12. At this time, you can go back to the dialog box in the Failover Control Center. Select Continue or
Stop to indicate if you want to continue monitoring the source. After you have selected whether or
not to continue monitoring the source, the source post-failback script, if configured, will be started.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 197

 The source must be online and Double-Take must be running to ensure that the source
post-failback script can be started. If the source has not completed its boot process, the
command to start the script may be lost and the script will not be initiated.

At this time, you can start any applications and allow end-users to access the data.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 198

Failing back then restoring
Use these instructions to failback first and then restore your data.
1. Resolve the problem(s) on the source that caused it to fail. If you have to rebuild your source,
make sure you use the same identity as the original source configuration.
2. Because you do not want your users accessing the source or its data until newer data from the
target can be restored, deny access to user logins by setting /etc/nologin. See your Linux
documentation for details on creating this file.
3. Stop any applications that may be running on your source. The files must be closed on the source
so that updated files from the target will overwrite the files on the source during the restoration.
4. From the Failover Control Center, select the target that is currently standing in for the failed
source.
5. Select the failed source and click Failback. The user downtime starts now. If you have a pre-
failback script configured, it will be started.
6. When failback is complete, the post-failback script, if configured, will be started. When the script is
complete, you will be prompted to determine if you want to continue monitoring the source. Select
Continue or Stop to indicate if you want to continue monitoring the source. After you have
selected whether or not to continue monitoring the source machine, the source post-failback
script, if configured, will be started.

The source must be online and Double-Take must be running to ensure that the source
post-failback script can be started. If the source has not completed its boot process, the
command to start the script may be lost and the script will not be initiated.

7. From the Replication Console, select Tools, Restoration Manager.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 199

 8. Identify the Original Source machine. This is your source machine where the data originally
resided.
9. Select the Restore From machine. This is the target machine where the copy of the data is
stored.
10. Replication Set contains the replication set information stored on the target machine (the
machine in Restore From). If no replication sets are available, the list will be blank. Select the
replication set that corresponds to the data that you need to restore.
11. Select the Restore To machine. This is your source where the updated data from the target will
be sent.
12. Select the Use Backup Replication Set check box to use the targets copy of the replication set
database for the restoration. If this check box is not marked, you will be accessing the replication
set information from the source.
13. Select the Restore Replication Set check box to restore the targets copy of the replication set
database to the source during the restoration process.
14. Select the Route on the target. This is the IP address and port on the target that the data will be
transmitted through. This allows you to select a different route for Double-Take traffic. For
example, you can separate regular network traffic and Double-Take traffic on a machine with
multiple IP addresses.
15. The Restore To Server Path and Restore From Server Path paths will automatically be
populated when the replication set is selected. The restore to path is the directory that is the

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 200

 common parent directory for all of the directories in the replication set. If the replication set crosses
volumes, then there will be a separate path for each volume. The restore from path is the path on
the target server where the replicated files are located.

Restoring across a NAT router requires the ports to be the same as the original
connection. If the ports have been modified (manually or reinstalled), you must set the
port numbers to the same values as the last valid source/target connection.

16. Select the restoration conditionals that you want to use.

l Overwrite existing data during restoreThis option restores all existing files by

overwriting them. Any files that do not exist on the source are written also. If this option is
disabled, only files that do not exist on the source will be restored.
l Only if backup copy's date is more recentThis option restores only those files that

are newer on the target than on the source. The entire file is overwritten with this option.

If you are using a database application, do not use the newer option unless you
know for certain you need it. With database applications, it is critical that all files, not
just some of them that might be newer, get mirrored.

l Use Checksum comparison to send minimal blocks of dataSpecify if you want the
restoration process to use a block checksum comparison to determine which blocks are
different. If this option is enabled, only those blocks (not the entire files) that are different will
be restored to the source.
17. If you want to configure orphan files, click the Orphans tab. The same orphan options are
available for a restoration connection as a standard connection.
18. Click Restore to begin the restoration.
After the restoration is complete, the restoration connection will automatically be disconnected and the
replication set deleted. At this time, you can start any applications and allow end-users to access the
data on the source.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 201

Server settings
Most of the Double-Take server settings are located in the Replication Console Server Properties dialog
box. To access this dialog box, right-click a server in the left pane of the Replication Console and select
Properties. The Server Properties dialog box contains multiple tabs with the Double-Take server
settings. For information on the server settings not available through the Replication Console, see the
Scripting Guide.
This section contains the following topics, each corresponding to a tab in the Server Properties dialog
box.
l Identifying a server on page 203
l Licensing a server on page 205
l Configuring server startup options on page 208
l Configuring network communication properties for a server on page 210
l Queuing data on page 130
l Configuring source data processing options on page 215
l Configuring target data processing options on page 217
l Specifying the Double-Take database storage files on page 218
l Specifying file names for logging and statistics on page 219
l E-mailing system messages on page 105

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 202

Identifying a server
From the Replication Console, you can see server identity information.
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties
3. Select the General tab.

4. Specify the server identity information. Some of the fields are informational only.
l NicknameA nickname is saved in the Replication Console workspace, therefore, it only

appears in the Replication Console on this server. It is not communicated across the
network. If you export a workspace and use it on another Double-Take server, the server
nickname will appear there also.
l MachineThis is the actual server name. This field is not modifiable.

l AddressesThe IP address(es) for this server are listed in this field. This information is

not modifiable and is displayed for your information. The machines primary address is
listed first.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 203

 l Client Transmit PortThis field displays the port that the Replication Console uses to
send commands to a server. This port cannot be modified.
l Discovery MethodThis field indicates the method in which the Replication Console

identifies the Double-Take server.

l ManualA Double-Take server was manually inserted into the Replication Console

server tree.
l Broadcast HeartbeatA Double-Take server is broadcasting Double-Take

heartbeats.
l Operating SystemThe servers operating system version is displayed.

l Double-Take Version InformationThe Double-Take version number and build

number are displayed.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 204

Licensing a server
From the Replication Console, you can manage your license keys. The license key is the Double-Take
license which is required on every Double-Take server. The license key is a 24 character, alpha-numeric
key. You can change your license key without reinstalling, if your license changes. There are different
licenses available.
l EvaluationAn evaluation license has an expiration date built into the license key. When the
license expires, the software will no longer function. The same evaluation licenses can be used on
multiple machines on a network.
l SingleA single license is available on a per-machine basis. Each server is required to have a
unique license whether it is functioning as a source, target, or both. A single license can only be
used on one server on a network.
l SiteA site license is available to register every machine with the same license. This license is
designed to be used on multiple servers on a network.
To prevent Double-Take from being used illegally on multiple servers, you may have received a license
key that must be activated from the Replication Console. Once the license key is entered, you have 14
days to activate it. The activation key can be obtained by supplying unique server information to Vision
Solutions. Since the activation key contains unique server information, specific to the hardware where
Double-Take is installed, the activation key cannot be used on any other server, thus prohibiting illegal
applications.
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Licensing tab. The fields displayed on this tab will vary depending on your license
keys.

The Replication Console Licensing tab uses older terminology, such as activation code
and node-locking. The activation code is actually your license key before it is activated.
Your node-locked code is the activation key that will activate your license.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 205

 4. Enter a license key and click Add. Repeat for each license key.
5. Highlight an license key in the list to display any status messages for that key below the list display.
6. If you need to remove a key from the server, highlight it in the list and click Remove.
7. To activate a license key, you need to provide server information which will be used to generate
an activation key.
a. After entering your license key, click OK to begin the grace period. At this point, you have
14 days to activate it.
b. Reopen the Server Properties Licensing tab.
c. Highlight your license key in the list to display the Node-Locking section at the bottom of the
Licensing tab.
d. Click the hyperlink in the Node-Locking section. If you do not have an Internet connection,
copy the Server Information text from the Node-Locking section into the form at
https://activate.doubletake.com from another machine.
e. After you submit the form, you will receive an email with an activation key. Enter that key on
the Licensing tab and click Add. The activation key is specific to this server. It cannot be
used on any other server. If the activation key and server do not match, Double-Take will
not run.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 206

 8. Click OK to apply the keys you entered.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 207

Configuring server startup options
From the Replication Console, you can configure server startup options for each Double-Take server.
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Setup tab.

4. Specify the server setup and source startup options.

l Log Statistics AutomaticallyIf enabled, Double-Take statistics logging will start

automatically when Double-Take is started.

l Enable Task Command ProcessingTask command processing is a Double-Take

feature that allows you to insert and run tasks at various points during the replication of
data. Because the tasks are user-defined, you can achieve a wide variety of goals with this
feature. For example, you might insert a task to create a snapshot or run a backup on the
target after a certain segment of data from the source has been applied on the target. This
allows you to coordinate a point-in-time backup with real-time replication.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 208

 Task command processing can be enabled from the Replication Console, but it can only be
initiated through the scripting language. See the Scripting Guide for more information.
If you disable this option on a source server, you can still submit tasks to be processed on a
target, although task command processing must be enabled on the target.
l Enable Extended Attribute replication/mirroringThis option enables extended
attribute replication and mirroring. You must enable this option on all of your source and
target servers.
l Automatically Reconnect During Source InitializationIf enabled, Double-Take will
automatically reconnect any connections that it automatically disconnected.
l Perform Remirror After Auto-reconnectIf enabled, Double-Take will automatically
perform a remirror after an auto-reconnect has occurred. You will also need to specify the
type of mirror that you wish to perform after an auto-reconnect.
l Differences with ChecksumAny file that is different on the source and target

based on date, time, and/or size is flagged as different. The mirror then performs a
checksum comparison on the flagged files and only sends those blocks that are
different.
l Differences with no ChecksumAny file that is different on the source and target

based on date, time, and/or size is sent to the target.

l FullAll files are sent to the target.

Database applications may update files without changing the date, time, or
file size. Therefore, if you are using database applications, you should use
the Differences with checksum or Full option.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 209

Configuring network communication properties for a server
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Network tab.

4. Specify the network communication properties.

l Default AddressOn a machine with multiple NICs, you can specify which address

Double-Take traffic will use. It can also be used on machines with multiple IP addresses on
a single NIC.
l Default ProtocolThe default protocol for all Double-Take communications is the

TCP/IP protocol. In the future, Double-Take may support other communication protocols.
l Service Listen PortDouble-Take servers use the Service Listen Port to send and

receive commands and operations between two Double-Take servers.

l Heartbeat Transmit PortA Double-Take server sends its heartbeats to the Heartbeat

Transmit Port.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 210

 l Status Listen PortDouble-Take servers use the Status Listen Port to listen for
requests from the Replication Console and other clients.
l Time Between HeartbeatsAll Double-Take servers transmit a heartbeat. This
heartbeat allows other Double-Take servers and Double-Take clients to locate and identify
the Double-Take servers. The heartbeat is a broadcast UDP transmission. This heartbeat
can be disabled, but if it is, Double-Take will not auto-detect the Double-Take servers to
populate the Replication Console. By default, there are 3 seconds between heartbeats. If
you set this option to 0, the heartbeats are disabled.
l Missed Heartbeat LimitThis is the number of heartbeats which can be missed before
transmission is stopped and data is queued on the source.
l Show Heartbeat Messages in LoggerThis checkbox enables the heartbeat messages
in the Double-Take log. Enabling this option will cause your logs to fill up faster.
l TCPWindow SizeThis option is the size, in bytes, of the buffer used for TCPtransfers.
This is an operating system buffer, not a Double-Take buffer. If this option is set to zero (0),
Linux kernel versions 2.6.7 or later can automatically tune this buffer setting for best server
performance. Therefore, the recommended setting is 0 for automatic tuning, if you are
using a version 2.6.7 or later Linux kernel. If you want to reduce or control network traffic,
you can configure this option to a static size. The default is 375000 for a 1 GB network.
Modifications should be relative to that speed using the calculation 37500 * network_
speed_in_bits_per_second / 100 Mbit.

If you want to control network traffic, you may find the Double-Take bandwidth
limiting features to be a better method.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 211

Queuing data
You should configure queuing on both the source and target.
1. Right-click the server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the Queue tab.
4. Specify the queue settings for the server.

l FolderThis is the location where the disk queue will be stored. Double-Take Availability
displays the amount of free space on the volume selected. Any changes made to the queue
location will not take effect until the Double-Take daemon has been restarted on the server.
Select a location on a volume that will have minimal impact on the operating system and
applications being protected. For best results and reliability, this should be a dedicated,
non-boot volume. The disk queue should not be on the same physical or logical volume as
the data being replicated.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 212

 Scanning the Double-Take Availability queue files for viruses can cause
unexpected results. If anti-virus software detects a virus in a queue file and deletes
or moves it, data integrity on the target cannot be guaranteed. As long as you have
your anti-virus software configured to protect the actual production data, the anti-
virus software can clean, delete, or move an infected file and the clean, delete, or
move will be replicated to the target. This will keep the target from becoming
infected and will not impact the Double-Take Availability queues.

l Maximum system memory for queueThis is the amount of system memory, in MB,
that will be used to store data in queues. When exceeded, queuing to disk will be triggered.
This value is dependent on the amount of physical memory available but has a minimum of
32 MB. By default, 128 MB of memory is used. If you set it lower, Double-Take Availability
will use less system memory, but you will queue to disk sooner which may impact system
performance. If you set it higher, Double-Take Availability will maximize system
performance by not queuing to disk as soon, but the system may have to swap the memory
to disk if the system memory is not available.
Since the source is typically running a production application, it is important that the amount
of memory Double-Take Availability and the other applications use does not exceed the
amount of RAM in the system. If the applications are configured to use more memory than
there is RAM, the system will begin to swap pages of memory to disk and the system
performance will degrade. For example, by default an application may be configured to use
all of the available system memory when needed, and this may happen during high-load
operations. These high-load operations cause Double-Take Availability to need memory to
queue the data being changed by the application. In this case, you would need to configure
the applications so that they collectively do not exceed the amount of RAM on the server.
Perhaps on a server with 1 GB of RAM running the application and Double-Take
Availability, you might configure the application to use 512 MB and Double-Take Availability
to use 256 MB, leaving 256 MB for the operating system and other applications on the
system. Many server applications default to using all available system memory, so it is
important to check and configure applications appropriately, particularly on high-capacity
servers.
Any changes to the memory usage will not take effect until the Double-Take daemon has
been restarted on the server.
l Maximum disk space for queueThis is the maximum amount of disk space, in MB, in
the specified Folder that can be used for Double-Take Availability disk queuing, or you can
select Unlimited which will allow the queue usage to automatically expand whenever the
available disk space expands. When the disk space limit is reached, Double-Take
Availability will automatically begin the auto-disconnect process. By default, Double-Take
Availability will use an unlimited amount of disk space. Setting this value to zero (0) disables
disk queuing.
l Minimum Free SpaceThis is the minimum amount of disk space in the specified Folder
that must be available at all times. By default, 50 MB of disk space will always remain free.
The Minimum Free Space should be less than the amount of physical disk space minus
Maximum disk space for queue.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 213

 The Maximum disk space for queue and Minimum Free Space settings work
in conjunction with each other. For example, assume your queues are stored on a
10 GB disk with the Maximum disk space for queue set to 10 GB and the
Minimum Free Space set to 500 MB. If another program uses 5 GB, Double-Take
Availability will only be able to use 4.5 GB so that 500 MB remains free.

l Alert at following queue usage percentageThis is the percentage of the disk queue
that must be in use to trigger an alert message in the Double-Take Availability log. By
default, the alert will be generated when the queue reaches 50%.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 214

Configuring source data processing options
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Source tab.

4. Specify how the source will process data.

l Replication Packets to 1 Mirror PacketYou can specify the ratio of replication

packets to mirror packets that are placed in the source queue. Specify a larger number if
you have a busy network that has heavy replication. Also, if you anticipate increased
network activity during a mirror, increase this number so that the replication queue does not
get too large.
l Replicate NT Security by NameThis is a Windows option only.

l Ignore Delete OperationsThis option allows you to keep files on the target machine

after they are deleted on the source. When a file is deleted on the source, that delete
operation is not sent to the target. (All edits to files on the source are still replicated to the

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 215

 target; only deletions of whole files are ignored.) This option may be useful to give you an
opportunity to make a backup of these files in the event they are needed in the future.

If delete operations are ignored long enough, the potential exists for the target to
run out of space. In that case, you can manually delete files from the target to free
space.

l Maximum Pending Mirror OperationsThis option is the maximum number of mirror

operations that are queued on the source. The default setting is 1000. If, during mirroring,
the mirror queued statistic regularly shows low numbers, for example, less than 50, this
value can be increased to allow Double-Take to queue more data for transfer.
l Size of Mirror PacketsThis option determines the size of the mirror packets that
Double-Take transmits. The default setting is 32768 bytes.
l Use Checksum on All blocks of data during a Difference MirrorThis option allows
a filedifference mirror to check each block of data, regardless of the file attributes. If this
option is not marked, Double-Take will assume files are synchronized if their attributes
match.

Database applications may update files without changing the date, time, or file size.
Therefore, if you are using database applications, you should use the Block
Checksum All option to ensure proper file comparisons.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 216

Configuring target data processing options
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Target tab.

4. Specify how the target will process data.

l Target Mirror Capacity High PercentageYou can specify the maximum percentage

ofsystem memory that can contain mirror data before the target signals the source to
pause the sending of mirror operations. The default setting is 20.
l Target Mirror Capacity Low PercentageYou can specify the minimum percentage of

system memory that can contain mirror data before the target signals the source to resume
the sending of mirror operations. The default setting is 10.
l Retry Delay for Incomplete Operations (seconds)This option specifies the amount

of time, in seconds, before retrying a failed operation on the target. The default setting is 3.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 217

Specifying the Double-Take database storage files
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Database tab.

4. Specify the database files that store the Double-Take replication set, connection, and scheduling
information.
l FolderSpecify the directory where each of the database files on this tab are stored. The

defaultlocation is the directory where the Double-Take program files are installed.
l Replication SetThis database file maintains which replication sets have been created

on the server along with their names, rules, and so on. The default file name is DblTake.db.
l ConnectionThis database file maintains the active source/target connection

information. The default file name is connect.sts.

l ScheduleThis database file maintains any scheduling and transmission limiting options.

The default file name is schedule.sts.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 218

Specifying file names for logging and statistics
1. Right-click a server on the left pane of the Replication Console.
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Logging tab.

4. Specify the location and file names for the log and statistics files.
l FolderSpecify the directory where each of the log files on this tab are stored. The default

location is the directory where the Double-Take program files are installed.
l Messages & Alerts

l Maximum LengthSpecify the maximum length of the client and daemon log files.

The default size is 1048576 bytes and is limited by the available hard drive space.
l Maximum FilesSpecify the maximum number of Double-Take alert log files that

are maintained. The default is 5, and the maximum is 999.

l Verification

l FilenameThe verification log is created during the verification process and details

which files were verified as well as the files that are synchronized. This field contains

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 219

 the name of the verification log, which is by default DTVerify.log.
l Maximum LengthSpecify the maximum length of the verification log file. The

default maximum length is 1048576 bytes (1 MB).

l AppendMark the Append check box if you want to append each verification

process to the same log file. If this check box is not marked, each verification process
that is logged will overwrite the previous log file. By default, this check box is
selected.
l LanguageAt this time, English is the only language available.

l Statistics

l FilenameThe statistics log maintains connection statistics such as mirror bytes in

queue or replication bytes sent. The default file name is statistic.sts. This file is a
binary file that is read by the DTStat utility.
l Maximum LengthSpecify the maximum length of the statistics log file. The default

maximum length is 10485760 bytes (10 MB). Once this maximum has been reached,
Double-Take begins overwriting the oldest data in the file.
l Write IntervalSpecify how often Double-Take writes to the statistics log file. The

default is every 5 minutes.

5. Click OK to save the settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 220

E-mailing system messages
You can e-mail system messages to specified addresses. The subject of the e-mail will contain an
optional prefix, the server name where the message was logged, the message ID, and the severity level
(information, warning, or error). The text of the message will be displayed in the body of the e-mail
message.
1. To enable e-mail notification for a server, right-click the server in the left pane of the Replication
Console and select Properties.
2. Select the E-mail Notification tab.

3. Select Enable notification.

Any specified notification settings are retained when Enable notification is disabled.

4. Specify your e-mail settings.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 221

 l Mail Server (SMTP)Specify the name of your SMTP mail server.

Specifying an SMTP server is the preferred method because it provides a direct

connection between the mail server and Double-Take Availability, which decreases
message latency and allows for better logging when the mail server cannot be
reached.

If you do not specify an SMTP server, Double-Take Availability will attempt to use
the Linux mail command. The success will depend on how the local mail system is
configured. Double-Take Availability will be able to reach any address that the mail
command can reach.

l Log on to SMTP ServerIf your SMTP server requires authentication, enable Log on
to SMTP Server and specify the Username and Password to be used for authentication.
Your SMTP server must support the LOGIN authentication method to use this feature. If
your server supports a different authentication method or does not support authentication,
you may need to add the Double-Take Availability server as an authorized host for relaying
e-mail messages. This option is not necessary if you are sending exclusively to e-mail
addresses that the SMTP server is responsible for.
l From AddressSpecify the e-mail address that you want to appear in the From field of
each Double-Take Availability e-mail message. The address is limited to 256 characters.
l Send ToSpecify the e-mail address that each Double-Take Availability e-mail message
should be sent to and click Add. The e-mail address will be inserted into the list of
addresses. Each address is limited to 256 characters. You can add up to 256 e-mail
addresses. If you want to remove an address from the list, highlight the address and click
Remove. You can also select multiple addresses to remove by Ctrl-clicking.
l Subject Prefix and Add event description to subjectThe subject of each e-mail
notification will be in the format Subject Prefix : Server Name : Message Severity : Message
ID : Message Description. The first and last components (Subject Prefix and Message
Description) are optional. The subject line is limited to 150 characters.
If desired, enter unique text for the Subject Prefix which will be inserted at the front of the
subject line for each Double-Take Availability e-mail message. This will help distinguish
Double-Take Availability messages from other messages. This field is optional.
If desired, enable Add event description to subject to have the description of the
message appended to the end of the subject line. This field is optional.
l Filter ContentsSpecify which messages that you want to be sent via e-mail. Specify
Information, Warning, and/or Error. You can also specify which messages to exclude
based on the message ID. Enter the message IDs as a comma or semicolon separated list.
You can indicate ranges within the list.

You can test e-mail notification by specifying the options on the E-mail Notification
tab and clicking Test. If desired, you can send the test message to a different e-mail
address by selecting Send To and entering a comma or semicolon separated list of
addresses. Modify the message text up to 1024 characters, if necessary. Click
Send to test the e-mail notification. The results will be displayed in a message box.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 222

 Click OK to close the message and click Close to return to the E-mail Notification
tab.

If an error occurs while sending an e-mail, a message will be generated. This

message will not trigger an e-mail. Subsequent e-mail errors will not generate
additional messages. When an e-mail is sent successfully, a message will then be
generated. If another e-mail fails, one message will again be generated. This is a
cyclical process where one message will be generated for each group of failed e-
mail messages, one for each group of successful e-mail messages, one for the next
group of failed messages, and so on.
If you start and then immediately stop the Double-Take daemon, you may not get e-
mail notifications for the log entries that occur during startup.
By default, most virus scan software blocks unknown processes from sending
traffic on port 25. You need to modify the blocking rule so that Double-Take
Availability e-mail messages are not blocked.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 223

Security
To ensure protection of your data, Double-Take offers multi-level security using native operating system
security features. Privileges are granted through membership in user groups. The groups can be local or
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). To gain access to a particular Double-Take source or
target, the user must provide a valid local user account that is a member of one of the Double-Take
security groups. Once a valid user name and password have been provided and the Double-Take
source or target has verified membership in one of the Double-Take security groups, the user is granted
appropriate access to the source or target and the corresponding features are enabled in the client.
Access to Double-Take is granted on one of the following three levels.
l Administrator AccessAll Double-Take features are available for that machine. This security
group name is dtadmin, and the default group IDis 501.
l Monitor AccessServers and statistics can be viewed, but functionality is not available. This
security group name is dtmon, and the default group IDis 502.
l No AccessServers appear in the clients, but no access to view the server details is available.
Although Double-Take passwords are encrypted when they are stored, Double-Takesecurity design
does assume that any machine running the Double-Take client application is protected from
unauthorized access. If you are running the Double-Take client and step away from your machine, you
must protect your machine from unauthorized access.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 224

Logging on and off
To ensure protection of your data, Double-Take offer multi-level security using native operating system
security features. Privileges are granted through membership in user groups defined on each machine
running Double-Take. To gain access to a particular Double-Take source or target, the user must
provide a valid operating system user name and password and the specified user name must be a
member of one of the Double-Take security groups. Once a valid user name and password has been
provided and the Double-Take source or target has verified membership in one of the Double-Take
security groups, the user is granted appropriate access to the source or target and the corresponding
features are enabled in the client. Access to Double-Take is granted on one of the following three levels.
l Administrator AccessAll features are available for that machine.
l Monitor AccessServers and statistics can be viewed, but functionality is not available.
l No AccessServers appear in the clients, but no access to view the server details is available.
Use the following instructions when logging on and off of a server.
1. Highlight a machine on the left pane of the Replication Console. By double-clicking the machine
name, Double-Take automatically attempts to log you on to the selected machine using the ID that
you are currently logged on with. Verify your access by the resulting icon.
2. If you have no access, the Logon dialog box will automatically appear. If you have monitor access
or want to log on with a different username, right-click the machine name and select Logon.

3. Specify your Username, Password, Domain, and whether you want your password saved.
4. Click OK and verify your access by the resulting icon and log on again if necessary.

When logging in, the user name, password, and domain are limited to 100 characters.

If your license key is missing or invalid, you will be prompted to open the Server Properties
General tab to add or correct the key. Select Yes to open the Server Properties dialog
box or select No to continue without adding a license key.
If the login does not complete within 30 seconds, it is automatically canceled. If this
timeout is not long enough for your environment, you can increase it by adjusting the
Communication Timeout on the Configuration tab of the Replication Console
properties. Select File, Options, from the Replication Console to access this screen.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 225

 Double-Take uses ICMP pings to verify server availability during the login process. If your
Double-Take server is across a router or firewall that has ICMP pings disabled, you will
need to disable the Double-Take ICMP ping verification. To do this, select File, Options,
from the Replication Console and disable Use ICMP to verify server availability.

Administrator rights
This icon is a computer with a gear and it indicates the Double-Take security is
set to administrator access.

Monitor rights
This icon is a computer with a magnifying glass and it indicates the Double-Take
security is set to monitor only access.

No rights
This icon is a lock and it indicates the Double-Take security is set to no access.

5. To log off of a Double-Take machine, right-click the machine name on the left pane of the
Replication Console and select Logout.

Chapter 3 Files and folders protection 226

Chapter 4 Full server protection
Create a full server job when you want to protect the entire source, including the server's system state.
You can also use it to protect an application server. This type of job is the most flexible, allowing you to
go from physical to physical, physical to virtual, virtual to virtual, and virtual to physical. For full server
protection, you will need to complete the following steps, in order.
1. Review the Full server requirements on page 228 to make sure your environment meets the
requirements.
2. Install the Double-Take Console on a Windows machine.
3. Install Double-Take on your Linux source and target servers.
4. Add your servers to your Double-Take Console. See Adding servers on page 34.
5. Create your Linux full server job. See Creating a full server job on page 233.

For installation and licensing instructions, see the Double-Take Installation, Licensing, and
Activation document.

Once your job is created and running, see the following sections to manage your job.
l Managing and controlling full server jobs on page 245You can view status information about
your job and learn how to control the job.
l Failing over full server jobs on page 261Use this section when a failover condition has been met
or whenever you want to failover.
l Reversing full server jobs on page 263Use this section to reverse protection. The source (what
was your original target hardware) is now sending data to the target (what was your original
source hardware).

Chapter 4 Full server protection 227

Full server requirements
Use these requirements for Linux full server protection. Keep in mind that a target server may meet
these requirements but may not be suitable to stand-in for a source in the event of a source failure. See
Target compatibility on page 232 for additional information regarding an appropriate target server for
your particular source.
l Source and target serversThe source and target servers can be a physical or virtual server
running any of the following operating systems.
l Operating systemRed Hat Enterprise Linux, Oracle Enterprise Linux, and CentOS
l Version5.9 through 5.11

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen, PAE

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen

l File systemExt3, Ext4 (except on version 5.11), XFS

l NotesOracle Enterprise Linux support is for the mainline kernel only, not the

Unbreakable kernel.
l Operating systemRed Hat Enterprise Linux, Oracle Enterprise Linux, and CentOS
l Version6.4 through 6.6

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault

l File systemExt3, Ext4, XFS (64-bit only)

l NotesOracle Enterprise Linux support includes the mainline kernel only for

version 6.3 and includes both the mainline kernel and the Unbreakable kernel for
versions 6.4 and 6.5.
l Operating systemSUSELinux Enterprise
l Version10.3 and 10.4

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, BigSMP, Xen,

XenPAE
l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen

l File systemExt3, ReiserFS, XFS

l Operating systemSUSELinux Enterprise

l Version11.2 through 11.3

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, Xen, XenPAE, VMI

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, Xen

l File systemExt3, ReiserFS, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version10.04.3

l Kernel version2.6.32-33

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architectures386, Generic, Generic-pae

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric, Preempt, Server

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

Chapter 4 Full server protection 228

 l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version10.04.4

l Kernel version2.6.32-38

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architectures386, Generic, Generic-pae

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric, Preempt, Server

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version12.04.2

l Kernel version3.5.0-23

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesGeneric

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version12.04.3

l Kernel version3.8.0-29

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesGeneric

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

For all operating systems except Ubuntu, the kernel version must match the
expected kernel for the specified release version. For example, if /etc/redhat-
release declares the system to be a Redhat 5.10 system, the kernel that is installed
must match that.

Double-Take does not support stacking filesystems, like eCryptFS.

l Packages and servicesEach Linux server must have the following packages and services
installed before you can install and use Double-Take. See your operating system documentation
for details on these packages and utilities.
l sshd (or the package that installs sshd)
l lsb

l parted

l /usr/bin/which

l /usr/sbin/dmidecode

l /usr/bin/scp (only if you will be performing push installations from the Double-Take Console

to your Linux servers)

l Source and target preparationMake sure your source and target servers are prepared for
mirroring, replication, and failover by following these guidelines.
l Uninstall any applications or operating system features that are not needed from both your
source and target. Ideally, your target should be as clean and simple a configuration as
possible.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 229

 l Resolve any maintenance updates on the source that may require the server to be
rebooted before failover.
l Do not failover if the target is waiting on a reboot after applying maintenance. If failover

occurs before the required reboot, the target may not operate properly or it may not boot.
l System memoryThe minimum system memory on each server should be 1 GB. The
recommended amount for each server is 2 GB.
l Disk space for program filesThis is the amount of disk space needed for the Double-Take
program files. This is approximately 285 MB on each Linux server.

Make sure you have additional disk space for Double-Take queuing, logging, and so on.

l Server nameDouble-Take includes Unicode file system support, but your server name
muststill be in ASCII format. If you have the need to use a server's fully-qualified domain name,
your server cannot start with a numeric character because that will be interpreted as an IP
address. Additionally, all Double-Take servers must have a unique server name.
l Protocols and networkingYour servers must meet the following protocol and networking
requirements.
l Your servers must have TCP/IP with static IP addressing.
l IPv4 is the only supported version.
l NATsupportFull server jobs can support NAT environments only when reverse protection is
disabled. Additionally, your NATenvironment must be an IP-forwarding configuration with one to
one port mappings. Port-forwarding is not supported. Make sure you have added your servers to
the Double-Take Console using the correct IP address.
l Name resolutionYour servers must have name resolution or DNS. The Double-Take Console
must be able to resolve the target, and the target must be able to resolve all source servers. For
details on name resolution options, see your Linux documentation or online Linux resources.
l PortsPort 1501 is used for localhost communication. Ports 1500, 1505, 1506, 6325, and 6326
are used for component communication and must be opened on any firewall that might be in use.
l SecurityDouble-Take security is granted through membership in user groups. The groups can
be local or LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). A user must provide a valid local
account that is a member of the Double-Take security groups
l SELinux policySELinux should be disabled on the source.
l UEFIThe source boot mode cannot be UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface).
l Trusted Boot (tboot)Trusted Boot is not supported and should be disabled on the source and
target.
l SnapshotsDouble-Take snapshots are not supported with Linux full server jobs.
l Supported configurationsThe following table identifies the supported configurations for a
Linux full server job.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 230

 Server Not
Description Supported
Configuration Supported

You can protect a single source to a single

One to one target. The target has no production activity. The
X
active/standby source is the only server actively replicating
data.
You cannot protect a single source to a single
One to one target where each server acts as both a source
X
active/active and target actively replicating data to each other.

You cannot protect many source servers to one

Many to one X
target server.
You can protect a single source to multiple
target servers. The source is the only server
actively replicating data. This will create
redundant copies of your source.You will only be
One to many X
able to configure reverse protection for the first
job. Subsequent jobs from that source will have
reverse protection disabled. This will create
redundant copies of your source.
You cannot protect a single source to a single
target, where the target then acts as a source,
Chained X
sending the same data from the original source
to a final target server.
Single server You cannot protect a single source to itself. X
Standalone to Your servers can be in a standalone to
X
standalone standalone configuration.
Standalone to Your servers cannot be in a standalone to
X
cluster cluster configuration.
Cluster to Your servers cannot be in a cluster to
X
standalone standalone configuration.

Cluster to Your servers cannot be in a cluster to cluster

X
cluster configuration.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 231

Target compatibility
l Operating system versionThe source and target must have the same distribution and major
version. For example, you cannot have a Red Hat version 5.8 source failing over to a Red Hat
version 6.4 target. The two servers do not have to have the same minor version. For example, you
can failover Red Hat version 6.4 to Red Hat version 6.5.
l Host nameThe source and target must have unique host names.
l ArchitectureThe source and the target must have the same architecture. For example, you
cannot failover a 32-bit server to a 64-bit server.
l ProcessorsThere are no limits on the number or speed of the processors, but the source and
the target should have at least the same number of processors. If the target has fewer processors
or slower speeds than the source, there will be performance impacts for the users after failover.
l MemoryThe target memory should be within 25% (plus or minus) of the source. If the target
has much less memory than the source, there will be performance impacts for the users after
failover.
l Network adaptersYou must map at least one NIC from the source to one NIC on the target. If
you have NICs on the source that are not being used, it is best to disable them. If the source has
more NICs than the target, some of the source NICs will not be mapped to the target. Therefore,
the IP addresses associated with those NICs will not be available after failover. If there are more
NICs on the target than the source, the additional NICs will still be available after failover and will
retain their pre-failover network settings.
l VolumesThe boot volumes must match between the source and target. For example, the boot
volume cannot be /boot on the source and / on the target. There are no limits to the number of
volumes, although you are bound by operating system limits. For each volume you are protecting
on the source, the target must have a matching volume. For example, if you are protecting /, /boot,
and /home on the source, the target must also have /, /boot, and /home. Additional target volumes
are preserved and available after failover with all data still accessible, however you will be unable
to reverse protection if the target has more volumes than the source.
l Double-Take versionIf you will be using the reverse feature with your full server job, your
source and target must be running the same Double-Take version.
l Disk spaceThe target must have enough space to store the data from the source. This amount
of disk space will depend on the applications and data files you are protecting. The more data you
are protecting, the more disk space you will need. The target must also have enough space to
store, process, and apply the source's system state data. If you will be enabling reverse
protection, the source must have enough space to store, process, and apply the target's system
state data.
A copy of the source data and system state will be staged on the target in a /staging-ssm location
for each mount point. For example, / will be staged in /staging-ssm and /boot will be staged in
/boot/staging-ssm. For reverse protection, the same staging structure is used. You can predict
how much space you will need in the staging folders by the amount of used space on the source or
target, respectively.
Keep in mind you should have extra space available on each server for any data growth.
l ServicesIdeally, you should have the same services and run levels on the source and target.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 232

Creating a full server job
Use these instructions to create a full server job.
1. Click Get Started from the toolbar.
2. Select Double-Take Availability and click Next.
3. Select Protect files and folders, an application, or an entire Windows or Linux server
and click Next.
4. Choose your source server. This is the Linux server that you want to protect.

l Current ServersThis list contains the servers currently available in your console
session. Servers that are not licensed for the workflow you have selected will be filtered out
of the list. Select your source server from the list.
l Find a New ServerIf the server you need is not in the Current Servers list, click the
Find a New Server heading. From here, you can specify a server along with credentials
for logging in to the server. If necessary, you can click Browse to select a server from a
network drill-down list.

If you enter the source server's fully-qualified domain name, the Double-Take Console
will resolve the entry to the server short name. If that short name resides in two different
domains, this could result in name resolution issues. In this case, enter the IP address of
the server.

When specifying credentials for a new server, specify a user that is a member of the local
dtadmin security group.

5. Click Next to continue.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 233

 6. Choose the type of workload that you want to protect. Under Server Workloads, in the
Workload types pane, select Full Server. In the Workload items pane, select the volumes on
the source that you want to protect.

7. By default, Double-Take selects the system and boot volumes for protection. You will be unable to
deselect these volumes. Select any other volumes on the source that you want to protect.
If desired, click the Replication Rules heading and expand the volumes under Folders. You will
see that Double-Take automatically excludes particular files that cannot be used during the
protection. If desired, you can exclude other files that you do not want to protect, but be careful
when excluding data. Excluded volumes, folders, and/or files may compromise the integrity of
your installed applications.

If you return to this page using the Back button in the job creation workflow, your
Workload Types selection will be rebuilt, potentially overwriting any manual replication
rules that you specified. If you do return to this page, confirm your Workload Types and
Replication Rules are set to your desired settings before proceeding forward again.

8. Click Next to continue.

9. Choose your target server. This is the server that will store the replica data from the source, and in
the event of a failover, it will become your source.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 234

 l Current ServersThis list contains the servers currently available in your console
session. Servers that are not licensed for the workflow you have selected and those not
applicable to the workload type you have selected will be filtered out of the list. Select your
target server from the list.
l Find a New ServerIf the server you need is not in the Current Servers list, click the
Find a New Server heading. From here, you can specify a server along with credentials
for logging in to the server. If necessary, you can click Browse to select a server from a
network drill-down list.

If you enter the target server's fully-qualified domain name, the Double-Take Console will
resolve the entry to the server short name. If that short name resides in two different
domains, this could result in name resolution issues. In this case, enter the IP address of
the server.

When specifying credentials for a new server, specify a user that is a member of the local
dtadmin security group.

10. Click Next to continue.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 235

11. You have many options available for your Linux full server job. Configure those options that are
applicable to your environment.
Go to each page identified below to see the options available for that section of the Set Options
page. After you have configured your options, continue with the next step on page 244.
l General on page 237
l Failover Identity on page 238
l Reverse Protection on page 239
l Network Adapter Options on page 241
l Mirror, Verify &Orphaned Files on page 242
l Compression on page 243
l Bandwidth on page 244

Chapter 4 Full server protection 236

 General

For the Job name, specify a unique name for your job.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 237

 Failover Identity

l Apply source network configuration to the targetIf you select this option, your
source IP addresses will failover to the target. If your target is on the same subnet as the
source (typical of a LAN environment), you should select this option. Do not select this
option if you are using a NAT environment that has a different subnet on the other side of
the NATrouter.

Do not apply the source network configuration to the target in a WAN environment
unless you have a VPN infrastructure so that the source and target can be on the
same subnet, in which case IP address failover will work the same as a LAN
configuration. If you do not have a VPN, you will have to reconfigure the routers by
moving the source's subnet from the source's physical network to the target's
physical network. There are a number of issues to consider when designing a
solution that requires router configuration to achieve IP address failover. Since the
route to the source's subnet will be changed at failover, the source server must be
the only system on that subnet, which in turn requires all server communications to
pass through a router. Additionally, it may take several minutes or even hours for
routing tables on other routers throughout the network to converge.

l Retain target network configurationIf you select this option, the target will retain all of
its original IP addresses. If your target is on a different subnet (typical of a WAN or
NATenvironment), you should select this option.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 238

 Reverse Protection

l Enable reverse protectionAfter failover, your target server is lost. Reverse protection
allows you to store a copy of the target's system state on the source server, so that the
target server will not be lost. The reverse process will bring the target identity back on the
source hardware and establish protection. After the reverse, the source (running on the
original target hardware) will be protected to the target (running on the original source
hardware).
In a LANenvironment, you may want to consider having two IPaddresses on each server.
This will allow you to monitor and failover one (or more) IPaddresses, while still leaving an
IPaddress that does not get failed over. This IP address that is not failed over is called a
reservedIPaddress and can be used for the reverse process. The reserved IP address
remains with the server hardware. Ideally, the reserved IPaddress should not be used for
production communications. The reservedIP address can be on the same or a different
subnet from your production IPaddresses, however if the subnet is different, it should be on
a different network adapter. The reserved IP addresses will also be used to route Double-
Take data.
You do not have to have a second IP address on each server. It is acceptable to use the
production IPaddress for reverse protection. In this case, Double-Take will block the DNS
record for that address while it is failed over.
l Select a reserved IPaddress on the sourceSpecify an IP address on the
source which will be used to permanently identify the source server. The IP address
you specify will not be failed over to the target in the event of a failure. This allows you
to reverse protection back to the source after a failover.
l Select a reserved IPaddress on the targetSpecify an IP address on the target
which will be used to permanently identify the target server. The IP address you
specify will not be lost during failover. This allows you to reverse protection back to
the source after a failover.

When reverse protection is enabled, your source server must have space to store,
process, and apply the target's system state data.

When the job is first started and reverse protection is enabled, an image of the
target's system state is mirrored to the source server. This mirror may cause a
performance impact on your source server. This impact is only temporary, and

Chapter 4 Full server protection 239

 system performance will return to normal when the reverse protection mirror is
complete.
To maintain system performance on the source, the target's system state is not
continuously replicated to the source. You can manually update the image of the
target's system state by viewing the job details and clicking Update under Target
Server Image. See Viewing full server job details on page 252.

l Disable reverse protectionIf you do not use reverse protection, after a failover, your
target server will be lost. In order to continue protecting your data, you will have to manually
rebuild your original source and restart protection, which can be a long and complicated
process. Also, if you disable reverse, you will lose the activated target license after failover.
This is your only supported option if you are using a NATenvironment.
l Send data to the target server using this routeSpecify an IP address on the

target to route Double-Take data. This allows you to select a different route for
Double-Take traffic. For example, you can separate regular network traffic and
Double-Take traffic on a machine with multiple IP addresses. You can also select or
manually enter a public IP address (which is the public address of the NATrouter) if
you are using a NAT environment.

If you change the IPaddress on the target which is used for the target route, you
will be unable to edit the job. If you need to make any modifications to the job, it will
have to be deleted and re-created.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 240

 Network Adapter Options

For Map source network adapters to target network adapters, specify how you want the IP
addresses associated with each NIC on the source to be mapped to a NIC on the target. Do not
mix public and private networks. Also, if you have enabled reverse protection, make sure that your
NICs with your reserved IP addresses are mapped to each other.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 241

 Mirror, Verify &Orphaned Files

l Mirror OptionsChoose a comparison method and whether to mirror the entire file or
only the bytes that differ in each file.
lDo not compare files. Send the entire file.Double-Take will not perform any
comparisons between the files on the source and target. All files will be mirrored to
the target, sending the entire file. This is equivalent to selecting the mirror all files
option prior to Double-Take version 7.1.
l Compare file attributes and data. Send the attributes and bytes that differ.

Double-Take will compare file attributes and the file data and will mirror only the
attributes and bytes that are different. This is equivalent to selecting the mirror
different files and use block checksum options prior to Double-Take version 7.1. If
you are using a database application on your source, select this option.
l General OptionsChoose your general mirroring options.
l Delete orphaned filesAn orphaned file is a file that exists in the replica data on
the target, but does not exist in the protected data on the source. This option
specifies if orphaned files should be deleted on the target.

Orphaned file configuration is a per target configuration. All jobs to the same
target will have the same orphaned file configuration.

If delete orphaned files is enabled, carefully review any replication rules that
use wildcard definitions. If you have specified wildcards to be excluded from
protection, files matching those wildcards will also be excluded from
orphaned file processing and will not be deleted from the target. However, if
you have specified wildcards to be included in your protection, those files that
fall outside the wildcard inclusion rule will be considered orphaned files and
will be deleted from the target.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 242

 Compression

To help reduce the amount of bandwidth needed to transmit Double-Take data, compression
allows you to compress data prior to transmitting it across the network. In a WAN environment this
provides optimal use of your network resources. If compression is enabled, the data is
compressed before it is transmitted from the source. When the target receives the compressed
data, it decompresses it and then writes it to disk. You can set the level from Minimum to
Maximum to suit your needs.
Keep in mind that the process of compressing data impacts processor usage on the source. If you
notice an impact on performance while compression is enabled in your environment, either adjust
to a lower level of compression, or leave compression disabled. Use the following guidelines to
determine whether you should enable compression.
l If data is being queued on the source at any time, consider enabling compression.
l If the server CPU utilization is averaging over 85%, be cautious about enabling
compression.
l The higher the level of compression, the higher the CPU utilization will be.
l Do not enable compression if most of the data is inherently compressed. Many image (.jpg,
.gif) and media (.wmv, .mp3, .mpg) files, for example, are already compressed. Some
images files, such as .bmp and .tif, are decompressed, so enabling compression would be
beneficial for those types.
l Compression may improve performance even in high-bandwidth environments.
l Do not enable compression in conjunction with a WAN Accelerator. Use one or the other to
compress Double-Take data.

All jobs from a single source connected to the same IP address on a target will share the
same compression configuration.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 243

 Bandwidth

Bandwidth limitations are available to restrict the amount of network bandwidth used for Double-
Take data transmissions. When a bandwidth limit is specified, Double-Take never exceeds that
allotted amount. The bandwidth not in use by Double-Take is available for all other network traffic.

All jobs from a single source connected to the same IP address on a target will share the
same bandwidth configuration.

l Do not limit bandwidthDouble-Take will transmit data using 100% bandwidth

availability.
l Use a fixed limitDouble-Take will transmit data using a limited, fixed bandwidth. Select

a Preset bandwidth limit rate from the common bandwidth limit values. The Bandwidth
field will automatically update to the bytes per second value for your selected bandwidth.
This is the maximum amount of data that will be transmitted per second. If desired, modify
the bandwidth using a bytes per second value. The minimum limit should be 3500 bytes per
second.
12. Click Next to continue.
13. Double-Take validates that your source and target are compatible. The Summary page displays
your options and validation items.
Errors are designated by a white X inside a red circle. Warnings are designated by a black
exclamation point (!) inside a yellow triangle. A successful validation is designated by a white
checkmark inside a green circle. You can sort the list by the icon to see errors, warnings, or
successful validations together. Click on any of the validation items to see details. You must
correct any errors before you can continue. Depending on the error, you may be able to click Fix
or Fix All and let Double-Take correct the problem for you. For those errors that Double-Take
cannot correct automatically, you will need to modify the source or target to correct the error, or
you can select a different target. You must revalidate the selected servers, by clicking Recheck,
until the validation check passes without errors.
After a job is created, the results of the validation checks are logged to the job log. See the
Double-Take Reference Guide for details on the various Double-Take log files.
14. Once your servers have passed validation and you are ready to establish protection, click Finish,
and you will automatically be taken to the Manage Jobs page.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 244

Managing and controlling full server jobs
Click Manage Jobs from the main Double-Take Console toolbar. The Manage Jobs page allows you
to view status information about your jobs. You can also control your jobs from this page.
The jobs displayed in the right pane depend on the server group folder selected in the left pane. Every
job for each server in your console session is displayed when the Jobs on All Servers group is
selected. If you have created and populated server groups (see Managing servers on page 29), then
only the jobs associated with the server or target servers in that server group will be displayed in the right
pane.
l Overview job information displayed in the top pane on page 245
l Detailed job information displayed in the bottom pane on page 247
l Job controls on page 249

Overview job information displayed in the top pane

The top pane displays high-level overview information about your jobs.

Column 1 (Blank)
The first blank column indicates the state of the job.

The job is in a healthy state.

The job is in a warning state. This icon is also displayed on any server groups that
you have created that contain a job in a warning state.

The job is in an error state. This icon is also displayed on any server groups that you
have created that contain a job in an error state.

The job is in an unknown state.

Job
The name of the job
Source Server
The name of the source. This could be the name or IP address of your source.
Target Server
The name of the target. This could be the name or IP address of your target.
Job Type
Each job type has a unique job type name. This job is a Full Server Failover for Linux
job. For a complete list of all job type names, press F1 to view the Double-Take
Console online help.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 245

Activity
There are many different Activity messages that keep you informed of the job activity.
Most of the activity messages are informational and do not require any administrator
interaction. If you see error messages, check the job details. Keep in mind that Idle
indicates console to server activity is idle, not that your servers are idle.
Mirror Status
l CalculatingThe amount of data to be mirrored is being calculated.
l In ProgressData is currently being mirrored.
l WaitingMirroring is complete, but data is still being written to the target.
l IdleData is not being mirrored.
l PausedMirroring has been paused.
l StoppedMirroring has been stopped.
l Removing OrphansOrphan files on the target are being removed or deleted
depending on the configuration.
l VerifyingData is being verified between the source and target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Replication Status
l ReplicatingData is being replicated to the target.
l ReadyThere is no data to replicate.
l PendingReplication is pending.
l StoppedReplication has been stopped.
l Out of MemoryReplication memory has been exhausted.
l FailedThe Double-Take service is not receiving replication operations from the
Double-Take driver. Check the Event Viewer for driver related issues.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Transmit Mode
l ActiveData is being transmitted to the target.
l PausedData transmission has been paused.
l ScheduledData transmission is waiting on schedule criteria.
l StoppedData is not being transmitted to the target.
l ErrorThere is a transmission error.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 246

Detailed job information displayed in the bottom pane
The details displayed in the bottom pane of the Manage Jobs page provide additional information for
the job highlighted in the top pane. If you select multiple jobs, the details for the first selected job will be
displayed.

Name
The name of the job
Target data state
l OKThe data on the target is in a good state.
l MirroringThe target is in the middle of a mirror process. The data will not be in a
good state until the mirror is complete.
l Mirror RequiredThe data on the target is not in a good state because a remirror
is required. This may be caused by an incomplete or stopped mirror or an operation
may have been dropped on the target.
l BusyThe source is low on memory causing a delay in getting the state of the data
on the target.
l Not LoadedDouble-Take target functionality is not loaded on the target server.
This may be caused by a license key error.
l Not ReadyThe Linux drivers have not yet completed loading on the target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Mirror remaining
The total number of mirror bytes that are remaining to be sent from the source to the
target
Mirror skipped
The total number of bytes that have been skipped when performing a difference. These
bytes are skipped because the data is not different on the source and target.
Replication queue
The total number of replication bytes in the source queue
Disk queue
The amount of disk space being used to queue data on the source
Bytes sent
The total number of mirror and replication bytes that have been transmitted to the
target
Bytes sent (compressed)
The total number of compressed mirror and replication bytes that have been
transmitted to the target. If compression is disabled, this statistic will be the same as

Chapter 4 Full server protection 247

 Bytes sent.
Connected since
The date and time indicating when the current job was started.
Recent activity
Displays the most recent activity for the selected job, along with an icon indicating the
success or failure of the last initiated activity. Click the link to see a list of recent activities
for the selected job. You can highlight an activity in the list to display additional details
about the activity.
Additional information
Depending on the current state of your job, you may see additional information
displayed to keep you informed about the progress and status of your job. If there is no
additional information, you will see (None) displayed.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 248

Job controls
You can control your job through the toolbar buttons available on the Manage jobs page. If you select
multiple jobs, some of the controls will apply only to the first selected job, while others will apply to all of
the selected jobs. For example, View Job Details will only show details for the first selected job, while
Stop will stop protection for all of the selected jobs.
If you want to control just one job, you can also right click on that job and access the controls from the
pop-up menu.

Create a New Job

This button leaves the Manage Jobs page and opens the Get Started page.

View Job Details

This button leaves the Manage Jobs page and opens the View Job Details page.

Delete
Stops (if running) and deletes the selected jobs.

Provide Credentials
Changes the login credentials that the job (which is on the target machine) uses to
authenticate to the servers in the job. This button opens the Provide Credentials dialog
box where you can specify the new account information and which servers you want to
update. See Providing server credentials on page 37. You will remain on the Manage
Jobs page after updating the server credentials. If your servers use the same
credentials, make sure you also update the credentials on the Manage Servers page
so that the Double-Take Console can authenticate to the servers in the console
session. See Managing servers on page 29.

View Recent Activity

Displays the recent activity list for the selected job. Highlight an activity in the list to
display additional details about the activity.

Start
Starts or resumes the selected jobs.
If you have previously stopped protection, the job will restart mirroring and replication.
If you have previously paused protection, the job will continue mirroring and replication
from where it left off, as long as the Double-Take queue was not exhausted during the

Chapter 4 Full server protection 249

 time the job was paused. If the Double-Take queue was exhausted during the time the
job was paused, the job will restart mirroring and replication.
Also if you have previously paused protection, all jobs from the same source to the
same IP address on the target will be resumed.

Pause
Pauses the selected jobs. Data will be queued on the source while the job is paused.
All jobs from the same source to the sameIPaddress on the target will be paused.

Stop
Stops the selected jobs. The jobs remain available in the console, but there will be no
mirroring or replication data transmitted from the source to the target. Mirroring and
replication data will not be queued on the source while the job is stopped, requiring a
remirror when the job is restarted. The type of remirror will depend on your job settings.

Take Snapshot
Snapshots are not applicable to full server for Linux jobs.

Manage Snapshots
Snapshots are not applicable to full server for Linux jobs.

Failover, Cutover, or Recover

Starts the failover process. See Failing over full server jobs on page 261 for the process
and details of failing over a Linux full server job.

Failback
Starts the failback process. Failback does not apply to full server for Linux jobs.

Restore
Starts the restoration process. Restoration does not apply to full server for Linux jobs.

Reverse
Reverses protection. The original source hardware will be reversed to the target
identity and the job will start mirroring in the reverse direction with the job name and log
file names changing accordingly. After the mirror is complete, the job will continue
running in the opposite direction. See Reversing full server jobs on page 263 for the
process and details of reversing a full server job.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 250

Recover
Recovers the selected DR job. Recovery does not apply to full server for Linux jobs.

Undo Failover or Cutover

Cancels a test failover by undoing it. Undo failover does not apply to full server for Linux
jobs.

View Job Log

Opens the job log. On the right-click menu, this option is called View Logs, and you
have the option of opening the job log, source server log, or target server log.

Other Job Actions

Opens a small menu of other job actions. These job actions are not available for full
server for Linux jobs.
Filter
Select a filter option from the drop-down list to only display certain jobs. You can display
Healthy jobs, Jobs with warnings, or Jobs with errors. To clear the filter, select
All jobs. If you have created and populated server groups, then the filter will only apply
to the jobs associated with the server or target servers in that server group. See
Managing servers on page 29.
Type a server name
Displays only jobs that contain the text you entered. If you have created and populated
server groups, then only jobs that contain the text you entered associated with the
server or target servers in that server group will be displayed. See Managing servers
on page 29.

Overflow Chevron
Displays any toolbar buttons that are hidden from view when the window size is
reduced.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 251

Viewing full server job details
From the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job and click View Job Details in the toolbar.
Review the following table to understand the detailed information about your job displayed on the View
Job Details page.

Job name
The name of the job
Job type
Each job type has a unique job type name. This job is a Full Server Failover for Linux
job. For a complete list of all job type names, press F1 to view the Double-Take
Console online help.
Health

The job is in a healthy state.

The job is in a warning state.

The job is in an error state.

The job is in an unknown state.

Activity
There are many different Activity messages that keep you informed of the job activity.
Most of the activity messages are informational and do not require any administrator
interaction. If you see error messages, check the rest of the job details.
Connection ID
The incremental counter used to number connections. The number is incremented
when a connection is created. It is also incremented by internal actions, such as an
auto-disconnect and auto-reconnect. The lowest available number (as connections are
created, stopped, deleted, and so on) will always be used. The counter is reset to one
each time the Double-Take service is restarted.
Transmit mode
l ActiveData is being transmitted to the target.
l PausedData transmission has been paused.
l ScheduledData transmission is waiting on schedule criteria.
l StoppedData is not being transmitted to the target.
l ErrorThere is a transmission error.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 252

Target data state
l OKThe data on the target is in a good state.
l MirroringThe target is in the middle of a mirror process. The data will not be in a
good state until the mirror is complete.
l Mirror RequiredThe data on the target is not in a good state because a remirror
is required. This may be caused by an incomplete or stopped mirror or an operation
may have been dropped on the target.
l BusyThe source is low on memory causing a delay in getting the state of the data
on the target.
l Not LoadedDouble-Take target functionality is not loaded on the target server.
This may be caused by a license key error.
l Not ReadyThe Linux drivers have not yet completed loading on the target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Target route
The IP address on the target used for Double-Take transmissions.
Compression
l On / LevelData is compressed at the level specified.
l OffData is not compressed.
Encryption
Encryption is not applicable to Linux jobs.
Bandwidth limit
If bandwidth limiting has been set, this statistic identifies the limit. The keyword
Unlimited means there is no bandwidth limit set for the job.
Connected since
The date and time indicating when the current job was made. This field is blank,
indicating that a TCP/IP socket is not present, when the job is waiting on transmit
options or if the transmission has been stopped. This field will maintain the date and
time, indicating that a TCP/IP socket is present, when transmission has been paused.
Additional information
Depending on the current state of your job, you may see additional information
displayed to keep you informed about the progress and status of your job. If there is no
additional information, you will see (None) displayed.
Mirror status
l CalculatingThe amount of data to be mirrored is being calculated.
l In ProgressData is currently being mirrored.
l WaitingMirroring is complete, but data is still being written to the target.
l IdleData is not being mirrored.
l PausedMirroring has been paused.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 253

 l StoppedMirroring has been stopped.
l Removing OrphansOrphan files on the target are being removed or deleted
depending on the configuration.
l VerifyingData is being verified between the source and target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Mirror percent complete
The percentage of the mirror that has been completed
Mirror remaining
The total number of mirror bytes that are remaining to be sent from the source to the
target
Mirror skipped
The total number of bytes that have been skipped when performing a difference. These
bytes are skipped because the data is not different on the source and target.
Replication status
l ReplicatingData is being replicated to the target.
l ReadyThere is no data to replicate.
l PendingReplication is pending.
l StoppedReplication has been stopped.
l Out of MemoryReplication memory has been exhausted.
l FailedThe Double-Take service is not receiving replication operations from the
Double-Take driver. Check the Event Viewer for driver related issues.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Replication queue
The total number of replication bytes in the source queue
Disk queue
The amount of disk space being used to queue data on the source
Bytes sent
The total number of mirror and replication bytes that have been transmitted to the
target
Bytes sent compressed
The total number of compressed mirror and replication bytes that have been
transmitted to the target. If compression is disabled, this statistic will be the same as
Bytes sent.
Target Server Image
When a full server job is created with reverse protection enabled, an image of the
target's system state is stored on the source server. This image allows you to reverse

Chapter 4 Full server protection 254

 your source and target after a failover. To improve performance, the target's system
state is not continuously replicated to the source. You should manually update the
image of the target's system state by clicking Update if there is a change on the target.
For example, if the credentials on the target server are updated, you should update the
target server image that is on the source. This reverse protection mirror may cause a
performance impact on your source server. This impact is only temporary, and system
performance will return to normal when the reverse protection mirror is complete.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 255

Validating a full server job
Over time, you may want to confirm that any changes in your network or environment have not impacted
your Double-Take job. Use these instructions to validate an existing job.
1. From the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job and click View Job Details in the toolbar.
2. In the Tasks area on the right on the View Job Details page, click Validate job properties.
3. Errors are designated by a white X inside a red circle. Warnings are designated by a black
exclamation point (!) inside a yellow triangle. A successful validation is designated by a white
checkmark inside a green circle. You can sort the list by the icon to see errors, warnings, or
successful validations together. Click on any of the validation items to see details. You must
correct any errors before you can continue. Depending on the error, you may be able to click Fix
or Fix All and let Double-Take correct the problem for you. For those errors that Double-Take
cannot correct automatically, you will need to modify the source or target to correct the error, or
you can select a different target. You must revalidate the selected servers, by clicking Recheck,
until the validation check passes without errors.
4. Once your servers have passed validation, click Close.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 256

Editing a full server job
Use these instructions to edit a full server job.
1. From the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job and click View Job Details in the toolbar.
2. In the Tasks area on the right on the View Job Details page, click Edit job properties.
3. You will see the same options for your full server to ESX appliance job as when you created the
job, but you will not be able to edit all of them. If desired, edit those options that are configurable
for an existing job. See Creating a full server job on page 233 for details on each job option.

Changing some options may require Double-Take to automatically disconnect,

reconnect, and remirror the job.

4. If you want to modify the workload items or replication rules for the job, click Edit workload or
replication rules. Modify the Workload item you are protecting, if desired. Additionally, you can
modify the specific Replication Rules for your job.
Volumes and folders with a green highlight are included completely. Volumes and folders
highlighted in light yellow are included partially, with individual files or folders included. If there is
no highlight, no part of the volume or folder is included. To modify the items selected, highlight a
volume, folder, or file and click Add Rule. Specify if you want to Include or Exclude the item.
Also, specify if you want the rule to be recursive, which indicates the rule should automatically be
applied to the subdirectories of the specified path. If you do not select Recursive, the rule will not
be applied to subdirectories.
Click OKto return to the Edit Job Properties page.

If you remove data from your workload and that data has already been sent to the target,
you will need to manually remove that data from the target. Because the data you
removed is no longer included in the replication rules, Double-Take orphan file detection
cannot remove the data for you. Therefore, you have to remove it manually.

5. Click Next to continue.

6. Double-Take validates that your source and target are compatible. The Summary page displays
your options and validation items.
Errors are designated by a white X inside a red circle. Warnings are designated by a black
exclamation point (!) inside a yellow triangle. A successful validation is designated by a white
checkmark inside a green circle. You can sort the list by the icon to see errors, warnings, or
successful validations together. Click on any of the validation items to see details. You must
correct any errors before you can continue. Depending on the error, you may be able to click Fix
or Fix All and let Double-Take correct the problem for you. For those errors that Double-Take
cannot correct automatically, you will need to modify the source or target to correct the error, or
you can select a different target. You must revalidate the selected servers, by clicking Recheck,
until the validation check passes without errors.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 257

 After a job is created, the results of the validation checks are logged to the job log. See the
Double-Take Reference Guide for details on the various Double-Take log files.
7. Once your servers have passed validation and you are ready to update your job, click Finish.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 258

Viewing a full server job log
You can view a job log file through the Double-Take Console by selecting View Job Log from the
toolbar on the Manage Jobs page. Separate logging windows allow you to continue working in the
Double-Take Console while monitoring log messages. You can open multiple logging windows for
multiple jobs. When the Double-Take Console is closed, all logging windows will automatically close.

The following table identifies the controls and the table columns in the Job logs window.

Start
This button starts the addition and scrolling of new messages in the window.

Pause
This button pauses the addition and scrolling of new messages in the window. This is
only for the Job logs window. The messages are still logged to their respective files on
the server.

Copy
This button copies the messages selected in the Job logs window to the Windows
clipboard.

Clear
This button clears the Job logs window. The messages are not cleared from the
respective files on the server. If you want to view all of the messages again, close and

Chapter 4 Full server protection 259

 reopen the Job logs window.
Time
This column in the table indicates the date and time when the message was logged.
Description
This column in the table displays the actual message that was logged.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 260

Failing over full server jobs
You will be notified in the console when a failover condition has been met. At this time, you should trigger
failover. You can also trigger failover at any other time you desire, thus allowing you to better control the
failover process.

Resolve any maintenance updates on the source that may require the server to be rebooted
before failover or failback. Also, do not failover or failback if the target is waiting on a reboot after
applying maintenance. If failover occurs before the required reboot, the target may not operate
properly or it may not boot.

1. On the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job that you want to failover and click Failover,
Cutover, or Recover in the toolbar.
2. Select the type of failover to perform.
l Failover to live dataSelect this option to initiate a full, live failover using the current data

on the target. The source is automatically shut down if it is still running. Then the target will
stand in for the source by rebooting and applying the source identity, including its system
state, on the target. After the reboot, the target becomes the source, and the target no
longer exists.
l Perform test failoverThis option should only be used if your target is a virtual server. It

is like live failover, except the source is not shutdown. Therefore you should isolate the
virtual server from the network before beginning the test using the following procedure.
a. Stop the job.
b. Take a snapshot of the target virtual server using your hypervisor console.
c. Attach the target virtual server to a null virtual switch or one that does not have
access to your network infrastructure.
d. Perform the test failover and complete any testing on the virtual server.
e. After your testing is complete, revert to the snapshot of the target virtual server from
before the test started.
f. Reconnect the target virtual server to the proper virtual switch.
g. Restart the job.
If your target is a physical server, contact technical support if you want to test failover,
because you will have to rebuild your target system volume after the test.
l Failover to a snapshotThis option is not available for full server jobs.
3. Select how you want to handle the data in the target queue.
l Apply data in target queues before failover or cutoverAll of the data in the target

queue will be applied before failover begins. The advantage to this option is that all of the
data that the target has received will be applied before failover begins. The disadvantage to
this option is depending on the amount of data in queue, the amount of time to apply all of
the data could be lengthy.
l Discard data in the target queues and failover or cutover immediatelyAll of the

data in the target queue will be discarded and failover will begin immediately. The
advantage to this option is that failover will occur immediately. The disadvantage is that any

Chapter 4 Full server protection 261

 data in the target queue will be lost.
4. When you are ready to begin failover, click Failover, Cutover, or Recover.

If you need to update DNS after failover, there is a sample DNSupdate script located in
/etc/DT/sysprep.d. You may need to modify the script for your environment. If you need basic
assistance with script modifications, contact technical support. Assistance with advanced
scripting will be referred to Professional Services.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 262

Reversing full server jobs
After a full server failover, the source is running on your original target hardware and your target no
longer exists. That means the source and target hardware now share the same identity, which is the
source identity.

If you did not enable reverse protection or if you have to rebuild your source, you will have to
reverse your protection manually.

1. Fix the issue that caused your original source server to fail.
2. Connect the original source server to the network.
3. Make sure the production NIC on your original source is online. If the NICis disabled or
unplugged, you will not be able to reverse. Make sure you continue to access the servers through
the reserved IP addresses, but you can disregard any IP address conflicts for the primary NIC.
Since the new source (running on the original target hardware) already has the source's address
assigned to it, the source reserved IP address (set during the job creation workflow) will be used
to identify the source. The machine names for both servers will be the same at this point. The
reserved IPaddresses which were selected during the job creation will be shown in parenthesis to
identify the machines.
4. On the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job that you want to reverse. If the job is not listed, you
may need to add your servers to your console again. Use the reserved IP addresses and local
credentials.
5. Highlight the job you want to reverse and click Reverse in the toolbar. During the reverse
process, you will see various states for the job. The Reversing state will be displayed when the
target identity is being established on the original source hardware. When the reverse process is
complete, the target (on the original source hardware) will reboot. At this point, your source is still
running on your original target hardware with the source name, but the original source hardware
now has the target identity. After reboot, the job will start synchronizing. During the synchronizing
process, protection is being established from the source (on the original target hardware) to the
target (on the original source hardware). The reverse protection is also established in the opposite
direction.
6. To go back to your original hardware, highlight the job and click Failover, Cutover, or Recover.
The source identity will now be applied to the target (on the original source hardware), and the
target identity will again be gone. Both servers will have the source identity.
7. To bring back the target identity, highlight the job and click Reverse. The same process as above
will be repeated, but on the opposite servers. When the reverse is complete, you will be back to
your original identities on the original hardware.

Chapter 4 Full server protection 263

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance
protection
Create a full server to ESX appliance job when you want to protect an entire physical server or virtual
machine to an ESX target. There is no reverse protection for this job. For full server to ESX appliance
protection, you will need to complete the following steps, in order.
1. Review the Full server to ESX appliance requirements on page 265 to make sure your
environment meets the requirements.
2. Deploy your Double-Take virtual recovery appliance. See the Double-Take Installation,
Licensing, and Activation document for details.
3. Install the Double-Take Console on a Windows machine. See the Double-Take Installation,
Licensing, and Activation document for details.
4. Add your virtual recovery appliance to the Double-Take Console. See Adding servers on page 34.
5. Install Double-Take on your Linux source servers. See the Double-Take Installation, Licensing,
and Activation document for details.
6. Add your source servers to your Double-Take Console. See Adding servers on page 34.
7. Create your full server to ESXappliance job. See Creating a full server to ESX appliance job on
page 270.

For installation and licensing instructions, see the Double-Take Installation, Licensing, and
Activation document.

Once your job is created and running, see the following sections to manage your job.
l Managing and controlling full server to ESX appliance jobs on page 287You can view status
information about your job and learn how to control the job.
l Failing over full server to ESX appliance jobs on page 302Use this section when a failover
condition has been met or whenever you want to failover.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 264

Full server to ESX appliance requirements
Use these requirements for full server to ESX appliance protection.
l Source serverThe source server can be a physical or virtual server running any of the
following operating systems.
l Operating systemRed Hat Enterprise Linux, Oracle Enterprise Linux, and CentOS
l Version5.9 through 5.11

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen, PAE

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen

l File systemExt3, Ext4 (except on version 5.11), XFS

l NotesOracle Enterprise Linux support is for the mainline kernel only, not the

Unbreakable kernel.
l Operating systemRed Hat Enterprise Linux, Oracle Enterprise Linux, and CentOS
l Version6.4 through 6.6

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault

l File systemExt3, Ext4, XFS (64-bit only)

l NotesOracle Enterprise Linux support includes the mainline kernel only for

version 6.3 and includes both the mainline kernel and the Unbreakable kernel for
versions 6.4 and 6.5.
l Operating systemSUSELinux Enterprise
l Version10.3 and 10.4

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, BigSMP, Xen,

XenPAE
l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, SMP, Xen

l File systemExt3, ReiserFS, XFS

l Operating systemSUSELinux Enterprise

l Version11.2 through 11.3

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesDefault, Xen, XenPAE, VMI

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesDefault, Xen

l File systemExt3, ReiserFS, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version10.04.3

l Kernel version2.6.32-33

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architectures386, Generic, Generic-pae

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric, Preempt, Server

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version10.04.4

l Kernel version2.6.32-38

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architectures386, Generic, Generic-pae

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 265

 lKernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric, Preempt, Server
l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version12.04.2

l Kernel version3.5.0-23

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesGeneric

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

l Operating systemUbuntu
l Version12.04.3

l Kernel version3.8.0-29

l Kernel type for x86 (32-bit) architecturesGeneric

l Kernel type for x86-64 (64-bit) architecturesGeneric

l File systemExt2, Ext3, Ext4, XFS

For all operating systems except Ubuntu, the kernel version must match the
expected kernel for the specified release version. For example, if /etc/redhat-
release declares the system to be a Redhat 5.10 system, the kernel that is installed
must match that.

Double-Take does not support stacking filesystems, like eCryptFS.

l Packages and servicesEach Linux server must have the following packages and services
installed before you can install and use Double-Take. See your operating system documentation
for details on these packages and utilities.
l sshd (or the package that installs sshd)
l lsb

l parted

l /usr/bin/which

l /usr/sbin/dmidecode

l /usr/bin/scp (only if you will be performing push installations from the Double-Take Console

to your Linux servers)

l Target host serverThe target host server must be an ESX server. It can be any of the
following ESXoperating systems.
l ESX 4.1 Standard, Advanced, Enterprise, or Enterprise Plus

l ESXi 4.1 Standard, Advanced, Enterprise, or Enterprise Plus

l ESXi 5.0 Standard, Enterprise, or Enterprise Plus
l ESXi 5.1 Essentials, Essentials Plus, Standard, Enterprise, or Enterprise Plus
l ESXi 5.5 Essentials, Essentials Plus, Standard, Enterprise, or Enterprise Plus
l Virtual recovery applianceThe target ESX host must have an existing virtual machine,
known as a virtual recovery appliance. This will be an OVF(Open Virtualization Format) virtual

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 266

 machine included with Double-Take. You must install this virtual machine before you can
establish protection. When you establish protection, the virtual recovery appliance will create a
new virtual machine, mount disks, format disks, and so on. If failover occurs, the new virtual
machine is detached from the virtual recovery appliance and powered on. Once the new virtual
machine is online, it will have the identity, data, and system state of the source. Since the virtual
recovery appliance maintains its own identity, it can be reused for additional failovers. Keep in
mind the following caveats for the virtual recovery appliance.
l The virtual recovery appliance must be a standalone virtual machine.

l It should not reside in any multiple virtual machine vApp.

l The appliance is pre-configured for optimal performance. You do not need to modify the

memory, CPU, or other configurations.

l You should not install or run anything else on this appliance.

l The firewall is disabled and should remain disabled.

l A single virtual recovery appliance can protect a maximum of 59 volume groups and raw

block devices (combined) from any number of sources.

l vCentervCenter is not required, but if you are using it, then you must use version 4.1 or later.
l PermissionsIf you want to limit the permissions required for the account that you will be using
for your full server to ESX appliance job, your account must have at a minimum the permissions
listed below. These permissions can be set at the vCenter, Datacenter, or host level.
l DatastoreAllocate Space, Browse Datastore, Low level file operations, and Remove

File
l Host, Local OperationsCreate Virtual Machine, Delete Virtual Machine, and

Reconfigure virtual machine

l NetworkAssign Network

l ResourceAssign virtual machine to resource pool

l Scheduled TaskCreate Tasks, Modify Task, Remove Task, and Run Task

l TasksCreate task and Update task

l Virtual Machine, ConfigurationAdd existing disk, Add new disk, Add or remove

device, Change resource, Modify device settings, and Remove disk

l Virtual Machine, InteractionDevice connection, Power off, and Power on

l Virtual Machine, InventoryCreate new, Register, Remove, and Unregister

l vMotionHost vMotion is only supported if you are using vCenter. Storage vMotion is not
supported.
l System memoryThe minimum system memory on each server should be 1 GB. The
recommended amount for each server is 2 GB.
l Disk space for program filesThis is the amount of disk space needed for the Double-Take
program files. This is approximately 285 MB on a Linux source server. The appliance needs
approximately 620 MB.

Make sure you have additional disk space for Double-Take queuing, logging, and so on.

l Server nameDouble-Take includes Unicode file system support, but your server name

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 267

 muststill be in ASCII format. If you have the need to use a server's fully-qualified domain name,
your server cannot start with a numeric character because that will be interpreted as an IP
address. Additionally, all Double-Take servers and appliances must have a unique server name.
l Protocols and networkingYour servers must meet the following protocol and networking
requirements.
l Your servers must have TCP/IP with static IP addressing.
l IPv4 is the only supported version.
l NATsupportFull server to ESXjobs can support NAT environments in an IP-forwarding
configuration with one to one port mappings. Port-forwarding is not supported. Make sure you
have added your servers to the Double-Take Console using the correct IP address.
l Name resolutionYour servers must have name resolution or DNS. The Double-Take Console
must be able to resolve the virtual recovery appliance, and the virtual recovery appliance must be
able to resolve all source servers. For details on name resolution options, see your Linux
documentation or online Linux resources.
l PortsPort 1501 is used for localhost communication. Ports 1500, 1505, 1506, 6325, and 6326
are used for component communication and must be opened on any firewall that might be in use.
l SecurityDouble-Take security is granted through membership in user groups. The groups can
be local or LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). A user must provide a valid local
account that is a member of the Double-Take security groups
l SELinux policySELinux should be disabled on the source.
l UEFIThe source boot mode cannot be UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface).
l SnapshotsDouble-Take snapshots are not supported with full server to ESXappliance jobs.
l Supported configurationsThe following table identifies the supported configurations for a full
server to ESXappliance job.

Server to
Not
Host Description Supported
Supported
Configuration

One to one You can protect a single source to a single target

X
active/standby host.
You cannot protect a single source to a single
One to one target host where the server and host act as
X
active/active both a source and target actively replicating data
to each other.
You can protect many source servers to one
target host. Replication occurs from each source
Many to one X
to the one target host. This will consolidate your
source servers to a single host.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 268

 Server to
Not
Host Description Supported
Supported
Configuration

You cannot protect a single source to multiple

One to many X
target hosts.
You cannot protect a single source to a single
target host, where the target host then acts a
Chained X
source in order to send the original source to
another target.
Single server You cannot protect a single source to itself. X
Standalone to Your source and target host can be in a
X
standalone standalone to standalone configuration.
Standalone to Your source and target host cannot be in a
X
cluster standalone to cluster configuration.
Cluster to Your source and target host cannot be in a
X
standalone cluster to standalone configuration.
Cluster to Your source and target host cannot be in a
X
cluster cluster to cluster configuration.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 269

Creating a full server to ESX appliance job
Use these instructions to create a full server to ESX appliance job.
1. Click Get Started from the toolbar.
2. Select Double-Take Availability and click Next.
3. Select Protect files and folders, an application, or an entire Windows or Linux server
and click Next.
4. Choose your source server. This is the Linux server that you want to protect.

l Current ServersThis list contains the servers currently available in your console
session. Servers that are not licensed for the workflow you have selected will be filtered out
of the list. Select your source server from the list.
l Find a New ServerIf the server you need is not in the Current Servers list, click the
Find a New Server heading. From here, you can specify a server along with credentials
for logging in to the server. If necessary, you can click Browse to select a server from a
network drill-down list.

If you enter the source server's fully-qualified domain name, the Double-Take Console
will resolve the entry to the server short name. If that short name resides in two different
domains, this could result in name resolution issues. In this case, enter the IP address of
the server.

When specifying credentials for a new server, specify a user that is a member of the local
dtadmin security group.

5. Choose the type of workload that you want to protect. Under Server Workloads, in the

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 270

 Workload types pane, select Full Server to ESX. In the Workload items pane, select the
volumes on the source that you want to protect.

6. By default, Double-Take selects the system and boot volumes for protection. You will be unable to
deselect these volumes. Select any other volumes on the source that you want to protect.

The swap partition is excluded by default and you cannot select it, however, it will be
created on the replica

If desired, click the Replication Rules heading and expand the volumes under Folders. You will
see that Double-Take automatically excludes particular files that cannot be used during the
protection. If desired, you can exclude other files that you do not want to protect, but be careful
when excluding data. Excluded volumes, folders, and/or files may compromise the integrity of
your installed applications.

If you return to this page using the Back button in the job creation workflow, your
Workload Types selection will be rebuilt, potentially overwriting any manual replication
rules that you specified. If you do return to this page, confirm your Workload Types and
Replication Rules are set to your desired settings before proceeding forward again.

7. Click Next to continue.

8. Choose your target server. This is the virtual recovery appliance on your ESX server.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 271

 l Current ServersThis list contains the servers currently available in your console
session. Servers that are not licensed for the workflow you have selected and those not
applicable to the workload type you have selected will be filtered out of the list. Select your
target server from the list.
l Find a New ServerIf the server you need is not in the Current Servers list, click the
Find a New Server heading. From here, you can specify a server along with credentials
for logging in to the server. If necessary, you can click Browse to select a server from a
network drill-down list.

If you enter the target server's fully-qualified domain name, the Double-Take Console will
resolve the entry to the server short name. If that short name resides in two different
domains, this could result in name resolution issues. In this case, enter the IP address of
the server.

When specifying credentials for a new server, specify a user that is a member of the local
dtadmin security group.

9. Click Next to continue.

10. Choose the server where your target virtual recovery appliance is located. This is also the server
where your replica virtual machine will be located.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 272

 l Current VMware ServersThis list contains the vCenter and ESX servers currently
available in your console session. Select your server from the list.
l Find a New VMware ServerIf the server you need is not in the Current VMware
Servers list, click the Find a New VMware Server heading.
l vCenter/ESXi ServerSelect your server from the list. If your server is not in the

list, manually type it in.

l User nameSpecify the root user or another user that has the administrator role on

the specified server.

l PasswordSpecify the password associated with the User name you entered.

l DomainIf you are working in a domain environment, specify the Domain.

Because of increased security of the cipher strengths introduced in vSphere 5.1,

you will be unable to access VMware servers running version 5.1 or later if your
Double-Take Console is running on Windows XP. If you are running the console on
Windows 2003, you will have to apply the hotfix in the knowledgebase article
948963. See http://support.microsoft.com/kb/948963. Other Windows operating
systems (Vista, Server 2008 and later) have the proper cipher strength built into the
operating system.

11. Click Next to continue.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 273

12. You have many options available for your full server to ESX appliance job. Configure those
options that are applicable to your environment.
Go to each page identified below to see the options available for that section of the Set Options
page. After you have configured your options, continue with the next step on page 286.
l General on page 275
l Replica Virtual Machine Location on page 276
l Replica Virtual Machine Configuration on page 277
l Replica Virtual Machine Volumes on page 278
l Replica Virtual Machine Network Settings on page 282
l Mirror, Verify &Orphaned Files on page 283
l Network Route on page 284
l Compression on page 285
l Bandwidth on page 286

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 274

 General

For the Job name, specify a unique name for your job.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 275

 Replica Virtual Machine Location

Select one of the volumes from the list to indicate the volume on the target where you want to
store the configuration files for the new virtual server when it is created. The target volume must
have enough Free Space. You can select the location of the .vmdk files under Replica Virtual
Machine Volumes.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 276

 Replica Virtual Machine Configuration

l Replica virtual machine display nameSpecify the name of the replica virtual machine.
This will be the display name of the virtual machine on the host system.
l Number of processorsSpecify how many processors to create on the new virtual
machine. The number of processors on the source is displayed to guide you in making an
appropriate selection. If you select fewer processors than the source, your clients may be
impacted by slower responses.
l Amount of memorySpecify the amount of memory, in MB, to create on the new virtual
machine. The memory on the source is displayed to guide you in making an appropriate
selection. If you select less memory than the source, your clients may be impacted by
slower responses.
l Map source virtual switches to target virtual switchesIdentify how you want to
handle the network mapping after failover. The Source Network Adapter column lists the
NICs from the source. Map each one to a Target Network Adapter, which is a virtual
network on the target.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 277

 Replica Virtual Machine Volumes

If your source has volume groups, you will see them listed in the Volume list. Highlight a volume
group and set the available Volume Group Properties that are displayed to the right of the
Volume list. The fields displayed in the Volume Group Properties will depend on your selection
for Virtual disk.
l Virtual DiskSpecify if you want Double-Take to create a new disk for your replica virtual
machine or if you want to use an existing disk.
Reusing a virtual disk can be useful for pre-staging data on a LAN and then relocating the
virtual disk to a remote site after the initial mirror is complete. You save time by skipping the
virtual disk creation steps and performing a difference mirror instead of a full mirror. With
pre-staging, less data will need to be sent across the wire initially. In order to use an
existing virtual disk, it must be a valid virtual disk, it cannot be attached to any other virtual
machine, and it cannot have any associated snapshots.
Each pre-existing disk must be located on the target datastore specified. If you have copied
the .vmdk file to this location manually, be sure you have also copied the associated -
flat.vmdk file too. If you have used vCenter to copy the virtual machine, the associated file
will automatically be copied. There are no restrictions on the file name of the .vmdk, but the
associated -flat.vmdk file must have the same base name and the reference to that flat file
in the .vmdk must be correct. Double-Take will move, not copy, the virtual disk files to the
appropriate folders created by the replica, so make sure the selected target datastore is
where you want the replica virtual disk to be located.
In a WAN environment, you may want to take advantage of using an existing disk by using a
process similar to the following.
a. Create a job in a LAN environment, letting Double-Take create the virtual disk for
you.
b. Complete the mirror process locally.
c. Delete the job and when prompted, do not delete the replica.
d. Move the virtual disk files to the desired target datastore. Do not forget to move the
associated -flat.vmdk file if you move the files manually.
e. Create a new protection job for the same source and reuse your existing disk.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 278

 If you have reused some existing disks and created some new disks, the numbering
of the hard disks will not be identical on the source and the replica virtual machine.
New disks will be created first and then existing disks will be attached. VMware
assigns the hard disk numbers in order of creation and then those that are
attached. The Virtual Device Node SCSIIDs will still be correct and there will be no
impact within the guest of the replica virtual machine.

If your source has multiple partitions inside a single .vmdk, you can only use an
existing virtual disk that Double-Take created. You can only use an existing virtual
disk created outside of Double-Take if there is one partition in each pre-existing
disk.

l DatastoreSpecify the datastore where you want to store the .vmdk files for the volume
group. You can specify the location of the virtual machine configuration files on the previous
Choose Volumes to Protect page.
l Replica disk formatIf you are creating a new disk, specify the format of the disk that will
be created.
l Flat DiskThis disk format allocates the full amount of the disk space immediately,

but does not initialize the disk space to zero until it is needed. This disk format is only
available on ESX 5; if you select this disk type on ESX 4, a thick disk will be created.
l ThickThis disk format allocates the full amount of the disk space immediately,

initializing all of the allocated disk space to zero.

l ThinThis disk format does not allocate the disk space until it is needed.

l Physical volume maximum sizeIf you have creating a new disk, specify the maximum
size, in MBor GB, of the virtual disks used to create the volume group. The default value is
equal to the maximum size that can be attached to the datastore you selected. That will
depend on your ESX version, your file system version, and the block size of your datastore.
l Volume Group sizeIf you are creating a new disk, specify the maximum size, in MBor
GB, of the volume group. The default value will match the source. This value cannot be less
than the logical volumes total size that you are trying to create on the volume group.
l Pre-existing virtual disks pathIf you are using an existing virtual disk, specify the
location of the existing virtual disks that you want to reuse.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 279

 If your source has logical volumes, you will see them listed in the Volume list. Highlight a logical
volume and set the available Logical Volume Properties that are displayed to the right of the
Volume list.

If you are using an existing virtual disk, you will not be able to modify the logical volume
properties.

The size and space displayed may not match the output of the Linux df command. This is
because df shows the size of the mounted file system not the underlying partition which
may be larger. Additionally, Double-Take uses powers of 1024 when computing GB, MB,
and so on. The df command typically uses powers of 1000 and rounds up to the nearest
whole value.

l NameThis field displays the logical volume name.

l Disk sizeThis field displays the size of the logical volume on the source.
l Used spaceThis field displays the amount of disk space in use on the source logical
volume.
l Replica volume sizeSpecify the size, in MBor GB, of the replica logical volume on the
target. The value must be at least the size of the specified Used space on that volume.

In some cases, the replica virtual machine may use more virtual disk space than the
size of the source volume due to differences in how the virtual disk's block size is
formatted and how hard links are handled. To avoid this issue, specify the size of
your replica to be at least 5 GB larger.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 280

 If your source has partitions, you will see them listed in the Volume list. Highlight a partition and
set the available Partition Properties that are displayed to the right of the Volume list. The fields
displayed in the Partition Properties will depend on your selection for Virtual disk.

The size and space displayed may not match the output of the Linux df command. This is
because df shows the size of the mounted file system not the underlying partition which
may be larger. Additionally, Double-Take uses powers of 1024 when computing GB, MB,
and so on. The df command typically uses powers of 1000 and rounds up to the nearest
whole value.

l Virtual DiskSpecify if you want Double-Take to create a new disk for your replica virtual
machine or if you want to use an existing disk. Review the details above under Volume
Group Properties Virtual Disk for information on using an existing disk.
l Disk sizeThis field displays the size of the partition on the source.
l Used spaceThis field displays the amount of disk space in use on the source partition.
l DatastoreSpecify the datastore where you want to store the .vmdk files for the partition.
You can specify the location of the virtual machine configuration files on the previous
Choose Volumes to Protect page.
l Replica disk formatSpecify the format of the disk that will be created.
l Flat DiskThis disk format allocates the full amount of the disk space immediately,

but does not initialize the disk space to zero until it is needed. This disk format is only
available on ESX 5; if you select this disk type on ESX 4, a thick disk will be created.
l ThickThis disk format allocates the full amount of the disk space immediately,

initializing all of the allocated disk space to zero.

l ThinThis disk format does not allocate the disk space until it is needed.

l Replica volume sizeSpecify the size, in MBor GB, of the replica partition on the target.
The value must be at least the size of the specified Used space on that partition.
l Pre-existing disks pathIf you are using an existing virtual disk, specify the location of
the existing virtual disks that you want to reuse.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 281

 Replica Virtual Machine Network Settings

l Use advanced settings for replica virtual machine network configurationSelect

this option to enable the replica virtual machine network setting configuration. This setting is
primarily used for WAN support.
l Network adaptersSelect a network adapter from the source and specify the Replica
IPaddresses, Replica Default Gateways, and Replica DNSServer addresses to be
used after failover. If you add multiple gateways or DNS servers, you can sort them by
using the arrow up and arrow down buttons. Repeat this step for each network adapter on
the source.

Updates made during failover will be based on the network adapter name when
protection is established. If you change that name, you will need to delete the job
and re-create it so the new name will be used during failover.

If you update one of the advanced settings (IP address, gateway, or DNS server),
then you must update all of them. Otherwise, the remaining items will be left blank.
If you do not specify any of the advanced settings, the replica virtual machine will be
assigned the same network configuration as the source.
By default, the source IP address will be included in the target IP address list as the
default address. If you do not want the source IP address to be the default address
on the target after failover, remove that address from the Replica IPaddresses
list.
Linux operating systems only support one gateway, so the first gateway listed will
be used.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 282

 Mirror, Verify &Orphaned Files

l Mirror OptionsChoose a comparison method and whether to mirror the entire file or
only the bytes that differ in each file.
lDo not compare files. Send the entire file.Double-Take will not perform any
comparisons between the files on the source and target. All files will be mirrored to
the target, sending the entire file. This is equivalent to selecting the mirror all files
option prior to Double-Take version 7.1.
l Compare file attributes and data. Send the attributes and bytes that differ.

Double-Take will compare file attributes and the file data and will mirror only the
attributes and bytes that are different. This is equivalent to selecting the mirror
different files and use block checksum options prior to Double-Take version 7.1. If
you are using a database application on your source, select this option.
l General OptionsChoose your general mirroring options.
l Delete orphaned filesAn orphaned file is a file that exists in the replica data on
the target, but does not exist in the protected data on the source. This option
specifies if orphaned files should be deleted on the target.

Orphaned file configuration is a per target configuration. All jobs to the same
target will have the same orphaned file configuration.

If delete orphaned files is enabled, carefully review any replication rules that
use wildcard definitions. If you have specified wildcards to be excluded from
protection, files matching those wildcards will also be excluded from
orphaned file processing and will not be deleted from the target. However, if
you have specified wildcards to be included in your protection, those files that
fall outside the wildcard inclusion rule will be considered orphaned files and
will be deleted from the target.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 283

 Network Route

By default, Double-Take will select a target route for transmissions. If desired, specify an alternate
route on the target that the data will be transmitted through. This allows you to select a different
route for Double-Take traffic. For example, you can separate regular network traffic and Double-
Take traffic on a machine with multiple IP addresses. You can also select or manually enter a
public IP address (which is the public IP address of the server's NATrouter) if you are using a
NAT environment.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 284

 Compression

To help reduce the amount of bandwidth needed to transmit Double-Take data, compression
allows you to compress data prior to transmitting it across the network. In a WAN environment this
provides optimal use of your network resources. If compression is enabled, the data is
compressed before it is transmitted from the source. When the target receives the compressed
data, it decompresses it and then writes it to disk. You can set the level from Minimum to
Maximum to suit your needs.
Keep in mind that the process of compressing data impacts processor usage on the source. If you
notice an impact on performance while compression is enabled in your environment, either adjust
to a lower level of compression, or leave compression disabled. Use the following guidelines to
determine whether you should enable compression.
l If data is being queued on the source at any time, consider enabling compression.
l If the server CPU utilization is averaging over 85%, be cautious about enabling
compression.
l The higher the level of compression, the higher the CPU utilization will be.
l Do not enable compression if most of the data is inherently compressed. Many image (.jpg,
.gif) and media (.wmv, .mp3, .mpg) files, for example, are already compressed. Some
images files, such as .bmp and .tif, are decompressed, so enabling compression would be
beneficial for those types.
l Compression may improve performance even in high-bandwidth environments.
l Do not enable compression in conjunction with a WAN Accelerator. Use one or the other to
compress Double-Take data.

All jobs from a single source connected to the same IP address on a target will share the
same compression configuration.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 285

 Bandwidth

Bandwidth limitations are available to restrict the amount of network bandwidth used for Double-
Take data transmissions. When a bandwidth limit is specified, Double-Take never exceeds that
allotted amount. The bandwidth not in use by Double-Take is available for all other network traffic.

All jobs from a single source connected to the same IP address on a target will share the
same bandwidth configuration.

l Do not limit bandwidthDouble-Take will transmit data using 100% bandwidth

availability.
l Use a fixed limitDouble-Take will transmit data using a limited, fixed bandwidth. Select

a Preset bandwidth limit rate from the common bandwidth limit values. The Bandwidth
field will automatically update to the bytes per second value for your selected bandwidth.
This is the maximum amount of data that will be transmitted per second. If desired, modify
the bandwidth using a bytes per second value. The minimum limit should be 3500 bytes per
second.
13. Click Next to continue.
14. Double-Take validates that your source and target are compatible. The Summary page displays
your options and validation items.
Errors are designated by a white X inside a red circle. Warnings are designated by a black
exclamation point (!) inside a yellow triangle. A successful validation is designated by a white
checkmark inside a green circle. You can sort the list by the icon to see errors, warnings, or
successful validations together. Click on any of the validation items to see details. You must
correct any errors before you can continue. Depending on the error, you may be able to click Fix
or Fix All and let Double-Take correct the problem for you. For those errors that Double-Take
cannot correct automatically, you will need to modify the source or target to correct the error, or
you can select a different target. You must revalidate the selected servers, by clicking Recheck,
until the validation check passes without errors.
After a job is created, the results of the validation checks are logged to the job log. See the
Double-Take Reference Guide for details on the various Double-Take log files.
15. Once your servers have passed validation and you are ready to establish protection, click Finish,
and you will automatically be taken to the Manage Jobs page.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 286

Managing and controlling full server to ESX appliance
jobs
Click Manage Jobs from the main Double-Take Console toolbar. The Manage Jobs page allows you
to view status information about your jobs. You can also control your jobs from this page.
The jobs displayed in the right pane depend on the server group folder selected in the left pane. Every
job for each server in your console session is displayed when the Jobs on All Servers group is
selected. If you have created and populated server groups (see Managing servers on page 29), then
only the jobs associated with the server or target servers in that server group will be displayed in the right
pane.
l Overview job information displayed in the top pane on page 287
l Detailed job information displayed in the bottom pane on page 289
l Job controls on page 291

Overview job information displayed in the top pane

The top pane displays high-level overview information about your jobs.

Column 1 (Blank)
The first blank column indicates the state of the job.

The job is in a healthy state.

The job is in a warning state. This icon is also displayed on any server groups that
you have created that contain a job in a warning state.

The job is in an error state. This icon is also displayed on any server groups that you
have created that contain a job in an error state.

The job is in an unknown state.

Job
The name of the job
Source Server
The name of the source. This could be the name or IP address of your source.
Target Server
The name of the target. This could be the name or IP address of your target.
Job Type
Each job type has a unique job type name. This job is a Full Server to ESX Appliance
job. For a complete list of all job type names, press F1 to view the Double-Take

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 287

 Console online help.
Activity
There are many different Activity messages that keep you informed of the job activity.
Most of the activity messages are informational and do not require any administrator
interaction. If you see error messages, check the job details. Keep in mind that Idle
indicates console to server activity is idle, not that your servers are idle.
Mirror Status
l CalculatingThe amount of data to be mirrored is being calculated.
l In ProgressData is currently being mirrored.
l WaitingMirroring is complete, but data is still being written to the target.
l IdleData is not being mirrored.
l PausedMirroring has been paused.
l StoppedMirroring has been stopped.
l Removing OrphansOrphan files on the target are being removed or deleted
depending on the configuration.
l VerifyingData is being verified between the source and target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Replication Status
l ReplicatingData is being replicated to the target.
l ReadyThere is no data to replicate.
l PendingReplication is pending.
l StoppedReplication has been stopped.
l Out of MemoryReplication memory has been exhausted.
l FailedThe Double-Take service is not receiving replication operations from the
Double-Take driver. Check the Event Viewer for driver related issues.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Transmit Mode
l ActiveData is being transmitted to the target.
l PausedData transmission has been paused.
l ScheduledData transmission is waiting on schedule criteria.
l StoppedData is not being transmitted to the target.
l ErrorThere is a transmission error.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 288

Detailed job information displayed in the bottom pane
The details displayed in the bottom pane of the Manage Jobs page provide additional information for
the job highlighted in the top pane. If you select multiple jobs, the details for the first selected job will be
displayed.

Name
The name of the job
Target data state
l OKThe data on the target is in a good state.
l MirroringThe target is in the middle of a mirror process. The data will not be in a
good state until the mirror is complete.
l Mirror RequiredThe data on the target is not in a good state because a remirror
is required. This may be caused by an incomplete or stopped mirror or an operation
may have been dropped on the target.
l BusyThe source is low on memory causing a delay in getting the state of the data
on the target.
l Not LoadedDouble-Take target functionality is not loaded on the target server.
This may be caused by a license key error.
l Not ReadyThe Linux drivers have not yet completed loading on the target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Mirror remaining
The total number of mirror bytes that are remaining to be sent from the source to the
target
Mirror skipped
The total number of bytes that have been skipped when performing a difference. These
bytes are skipped because the data is not different on the source and target.
Replication queue
The total number of replication bytes in the source queue
Disk queue
The amount of disk space being used to queue data on the source
Bytes sent
The total number of mirror and replication bytes that have been transmitted to the
target
Bytes sent (compressed)
The total number of compressed mirror and replication bytes that have been
transmitted to the target. If compression is disabled, this statistic will be the same as

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 289

 Bytes sent.
Connected since
The date and time indicating when the current job was started.
Recent activity
Displays the most recent activity for the selected job, along with an icon indicating the
success or failure of the last initiated activity. Click the link to see a list of recent activities
for the selected job. You can highlight an activity in the list to display additional details
about the activity.
Additional information
Depending on the current state of your job, you may see additional information
displayed to keep you informed about the progress and status of your job. If there is no
additional information, you will see (None) displayed.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 290

Job controls
You can control your job through the toolbar buttons available on the Manage jobs page. If you select
multiple jobs, some of the controls will apply only to the first selected job, while others will apply to all of
the selected jobs. For example, View Job Details will only show details for the first selected job, while
Stop will stop protection for all of the selected jobs.
If you want to control just one job, you can also right click on that job and access the controls from the
pop-up menu.

Create a New Job

This button leaves the Manage Jobs page and opens the Get Started page.

View Job Details

This button leaves the Manage Jobs page and opens the View Job Details page.

Delete
Stops (if running) and deletes the selected jobs.
If you no longer want to protect the source and no longer need the replica of the source
on the target, select to delete the associated replica virtual machine. Selecting this
option will remove the job and completely delete the replica virtual machine on the
target.
If you no longer want to mirror and replicate data from the source to the target but still
want to keep the replica of the source on the target, select to keep the associated
replica virtual machine.

Provide Credentials
Changes the login credentials that the job (which is on the target machine) uses to
authenticate to the servers in the job. This button opens the Provide Credentials dialog
box where you can specify the new account information and which servers you want to
update. See Providing server credentials on page 37. You will remain on the Manage
Jobs page after updating the server credentials. If your servers use the same
credentials, make sure you also update the credentials on the Manage Servers page
so that the Double-Take Console can authenticate to the servers in the console
session. See Managing servers on page 29.

View Recent Activity

Displays the recent activity list for the selected job. Highlight an activity in the list to
display additional details about the activity.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 291

Start
Starts or resumes the selected jobs.
If you have previously stopped protection, the job will restart mirroring and replication.
If you have previously paused protection, the job will continue mirroring and replication
from where it left off, as long as the Double-Take queue was not exhausted during the
time the job was paused. If the Double-Take queue was exhausted during the time the
job was paused, the job will restart mirroring and replication.
Also if you have previously paused protection, all jobs from the same source to the
same IP address on the target will be resumed.

Pause
Pauses the selected jobs. Data will be queued on the source while the job is paused.
All jobs from the same source to the sameIPaddress on the target will be paused.

Stop
Stops the selected jobs. The jobs remain available in the console, but there will be no
mirroring or replication data transmitted from the source to the target. Mirroring and
replication data will not be queued on the source while the job is stopped, requiring a
remirror when the job is restarted. The type of remirror will depend on your job settings.

Take Snapshot
Snapshots are not applicable to full server to ESX appliance jobs.

Manage Snapshots
Snapshots are not applicable to full server to ESX appliance jobs.

Failover, Cutover, or Recover

Starts the failover process. See Failing over full server to ESX appliance jobs on page
302 for the process and details of failing over a full server to ESX appliance job.

Failback
Starts the failback process. Failback does not apply to full server to ESX appliance
jobs.

Restore
Starts the restoration process. Restore does not apply to full server to ESX appliance
jobs.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 292

Reverse
Reverses protection. Reverse protection does not apply to full server to ESX appliance
jobs.

Recover
Recovers the selected DR job. Recovery does not apply to full server to ESXappliance
jobs.

Undo Failover or Cutover

Cancels a test failover by undoing it. Undo failover does not apply to full server to
ESXappliance jobs.

View Job Log

Opens the job log. On the right-click menu, this option is called View Logs, and you
have the option of opening the job log, source server log, or target server log.

Other Job Actions

Opens a small menu of other job actions. These job actions are not available for full
server to ESX appliance jobs.
Filter
Select a filter option from the drop-down list to only display certain jobs. You can display
Healthy jobs, Jobs with warnings, or Jobs with errors. To clear the filter, select
All jobs. If you have created and populated server groups, then the filter will only apply
to the jobs associated with the server or target servers in that server group. See
Managing servers on page 29.
Type a server name
Displays only jobs that contain the text you entered. If you have created and populated
server groups, then only jobs that contain the text you entered associated with the
server or target servers in that server group will be displayed. See Managing servers
on page 29.

Overflow Chevron
Displays any toolbar buttons that are hidden from view when the window size is
reduced.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 293

Viewing full server to ESX appliance job details
From the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job and click View Job Details in the toolbar.
Review the following table to understand the detailed information about your job displayed on the View
Job Details page.

Job name
The name of the job
Job type
Each job type has a unique job type name. This job is a Full Server to ESX Appliance
job. For a complete list of all job type names, press F1 to view the Double-Take
Console online help.
Health

The job is in a healthy state.

The job is in a warning state.

The job is in an error state.

The job is in an unknown state.

Activity
There are many different Activity messages that keep you informed of the job activity.
Most of the activity messages are informational and do not require any administrator
interaction. If you see error messages, check the rest of the job details.
Connection ID
The incremental counter used to number connections. The number is incremented
when a connection is created. It is also incremented by internal actions, such as an
auto-disconnect and auto-reconnect. The lowest available number (as connections are
created, stopped, deleted, and so on) will always be used. The counter is reset to one
each time the Double-Take service is restarted.
Transmit mode
l ActiveData is being transmitted to the target.
l PausedData transmission has been paused.
l ScheduledData transmission is waiting on schedule criteria.
l StoppedData is not being transmitted to the target.
l ErrorThere is a transmission error.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 294

Target data state
l OKThe data on the target is in a good state.
l MirroringThe target is in the middle of a mirror process. The data will not be in a
good state until the mirror is complete.
l Mirror RequiredThe data on the target is not in a good state because a remirror
is required. This may be caused by an incomplete or stopped mirror or an operation
may have been dropped on the target.
l BusyThe source is low on memory causing a delay in getting the state of the data
on the target.
l Not LoadedDouble-Take target functionality is not loaded on the target server.
This may be caused by a license key error.
l Not ReadyThe Linux drivers have not yet completed loading on the target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Target route
The IP address on the target used for Double-Take transmissions.
Compression
l On / LevelData is compressed at the level specified.
l OffData is not compressed.
Encryption
Encryption is not applicable to Linux jobs.
Bandwidth limit
If bandwidth limiting has been set, this statistic identifies the limit. The keyword
Unlimited means there is no bandwidth limit set for the job.
Connected since
The date and time indicating when the current job was made. This field is blank,
indicating that a TCP/IP socket is not present, when the job is waiting on transmit
options or if the transmission has been stopped. This field will maintain the date and
time, indicating that a TCP/IP socket is present, when transmission has been paused.
Additional information
Depending on the current state of your job, you may see additional information
displayed to keep you informed about the progress and status of your job. If there is no
additional information, you will see (None) displayed.
Mirror status
l CalculatingThe amount of data to be mirrored is being calculated.
l In ProgressData is currently being mirrored.
l WaitingMirroring is complete, but data is still being written to the target.
l IdleData is not being mirrored.
l PausedMirroring has been paused.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 295

 l StoppedMirroring has been stopped.
l Removing OrphansOrphan files on the target are being removed or deleted
depending on the configuration.
l VerifyingData is being verified between the source and target.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Mirror percent complete
The percentage of the mirror that has been completed
Mirror remaining
The total number of mirror bytes that are remaining to be sent from the source to the
target
Mirror skipped
The total number of bytes that have been skipped when performing a difference. These
bytes are skipped because the data is not different on the source and target.
Replication status
l ReplicatingData is being replicated to the target.
l ReadyThere is no data to replicate.
l PendingReplication is pending.
l StoppedReplication has been stopped.
l Out of MemoryReplication memory has been exhausted.
l FailedThe Double-Take service is not receiving replication operations from the
Double-Take driver. Check the Event Viewer for driver related issues.
l UnknownThe console cannot determine the status.
Replication queue
The total number of replication bytes in the source queue
Disk queue
The amount of disk space being used to queue data on the source
Bytes sent
The total number of mirror and replication bytes that have been transmitted to the
target
Bytes sent compressed
The total number of compressed mirror and replication bytes that have been
transmitted to the target. If compression is disabled, this statistic will be the same as
Bytes sent.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 296

Validating a full server to ESXappliance job
Over time, you may want to confirm that any changes in your network or environment have not impacted
your Double-Take job. Use these instructions to validate an existing job.
1. From the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job and click View Job Details in the toolbar.
2. In the Tasks area on the right on the View Job Details page, click Validate job properties.
3. Double-Take validates that your source and target are compatible. The Summary page displays
your options and validation items.
Errors are designated by a white X inside a red circle. Warnings are designated by a black
exclamation point (!) inside a yellow triangle. A successful validation is designated by a white
checkmark inside a green circle. You can sort the list by the icon to see errors, warnings, or
successful validations together. Click on any of the validation items to see details. You must
correct any errors before you can continue. Depending on the error, you may be able to click Fix
or Fix All and let Double-Take correct the problem for you. For those errors that Double-Take
cannot correct automatically, you will need to modify the source or target to correct the error, or
you can select a different target. You must revalidate the selected servers, by clicking Recheck,
until the validation check passes without errors.
4. Once your servers have passed validation, click Close.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 297

Editing a full server to ESX appliance job
Use these instructions to edit a full server to ESXappliance job.
1. From the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job and click View Job Details in the toolbar.
2. In the Tasks area on the right on the View Job Details page, click Edit job properties.
3. You will see the same options for your full server to ESX appliance job as when you created the
job, but you will not be able to edit all of them. If desired, edit those options that are configurable
for an existing job. See Creating a full server to ESX appliance job on page 270 for details on each
job option.

Changing some options may require Double-Take to automatically disconnect,

reconnect, and remirror the job.

4. If you want to modify the workload items or replication rules for the job, click Edit workload or
replication rules. Modify the Workload item you are protecting, if desired. Additionally, you can
modify the specific Replication Rules for your job.
Volumes and folders with a green highlight are included completely. Volumes and folders
highlighted in light yellow are included partially, with individual files or folders included. If there is
no highlight, no part of the volume or folder is included. To modify the items selected, highlight a
volume, folder, or file and click Add Rule. Specify if you want to Include or Exclude the item.
Also, specify if you want the rule to be recursive, which indicates the rule should automatically be
applied to the subdirectories of the specified path. If you do not select Recursive, the rule will not
be applied to subdirectories.
If you need to remove a rule, highlight it in the list at the bottom and click Remove Rule. Be
careful when removing rules. Double-Take may create multiple rules when you are adding
directories. For example, if you add /home/admin to be included in protection, then /home will be
excluded. If you remove the /home exclusion rule, then the /home/admin rule will be removed
also.
Click OKto return to the Edit Job Properties page.

If you remove data from your workload and that data has already been sent to the target,
you will need to manually remove that data from the target. Because the data you
removed is no longer included in the replication rules, Double-Take orphan file detection
cannot remove the data for you. Therefore, you have to remove it manually.

5. Click Next to continue.

6. Double-Take validates that your source and target are compatible. The Summary page displays
your options and validation items.
Errors are designated by a white X inside a red circle. Warnings are designated by a black
exclamation point (!) inside a yellow triangle. A successful validation is designated by a white
checkmark inside a green circle. You can sort the list by the icon to see errors, warnings, or

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 298

 successful validations together. Click on any of the validation items to see details. You must
correct any errors before you can continue. Depending on the error, you may be able to click Fix
or Fix All and let Double-Take correct the problem for you. For those errors that Double-Take
cannot correct automatically, you will need to modify the source or target to correct the error, or
you can select a different target. You must revalidate the selected servers, by clicking Recheck,
until the validation check passes without errors.
After a job is created, the results of the validation checks are logged to the job log. See the
Double-Take Reference Guide for details on the various Double-Take log files.
7. Once your servers have passed validation and you are ready to update your job, click Finish.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 299

Viewing a full server to ESX appliance job log
You can view a job log file through the Double-Take Console by selecting View Job Log from the
toolbar on the Manage Jobs page. Separate logging windows allow you to continue working in the
Double-Take Console while monitoring log messages. You can open multiple logging windows for
multiple jobs. When the Double-Take Console is closed, all logging windows will automatically close.

The following table identifies the controls and the table columns in the Job logs window.

Start
This button starts the addition and scrolling of new messages in the window.

Pause
This button pauses the addition and scrolling of new messages in the window. This is
only for the Job logs window. The messages are still logged to their respective files on
the server.

Copy
This button copies the messages selected in the Job logs window to the Windows
clipboard.

Clear
This button clears the Job logs window. The messages are not cleared from the
respective files on the server. If you want to view all of the messages again, close and

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 300

 reopen the Job logs window.
Time
This column in the table indicates the date and time when the message was logged.
Description
This column in the table displays the actual message that was logged.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 301

Failing over full server to ESX appliance jobs
You will be notified in the console when a failover condition has been met. At this time, you should trigger
failover. You can also trigger failover at any other time you desire, thus allowing you to better control the
failover process.
1. On the Manage Jobs page, highlight the job that you want to failover and click Failover,
Cutover, or Recover in the toolbar.
2. Select the type of failover to perform.
l Failover to live dataSelect this option to initiate a full, live failover using the current data

on the target. This option will shutdown the source machine (if it is online), stop the
protection job, and start the replica virtual machine on the target with full network
connectivity.
l Perform test failoverThis option is not applicable to full server to ESX appliance jobs.

l Failover to a snapshotThis option is not available for full server to ESX appliance jobs.

3. Select how you want to handle the data in the target queue.
l Discard data in the target queues and failover or cutover immediatelyAll of the

data in the target queue will be discarded and failover will begin immediately. The
advantage to this option is that failover will occur immediately. The disadvantage is that any
data in the target queue will be lost.
4. When you are ready to begin failover, click Failover, Cutover, or Recover.

If you need to update DNS after failover, there is a sample DNSupdate script located in
/etc/DT/sysprep.d. You may need to modify the script for your environment. If you need basic
assistance with script modifications, contact technical support. Assistance with advanced
scripting will be referred to Professional Services.

There is no reverse or failback once you have failed over.

Chapter 5 Full server to ESX appliance protection 302